=i-taen sear 
me 


ey Sorat an 


behets Ro Heiter to ra ee Be tin Pr nih { fi P aferieel , shih Aa . : 
Dray aah i Lite cas Tine hale od oe 5 The Ray hts iad IS Di en Hee ied Sh " Sy saty ra ri 
; a itary solhet ad os Had yhe ibe Pere i 
Ncipcletiadan eet a tb pha : if i aeetin 


Hei be Rell ote eager 
sebatnm etal tect 
“is ‘ iNT aoa - sew cbce tie hee 
hin inp Abeer tick fenced aad pes HR hy Rage EM Sarda he Bax ge fo he Fey Dai Rees ET SRP eae Magy UN «oP wy es : 
Sete ar eigts Lyrae aah er See tw PO hea S POE ESTO ag Tee Pele ag Ie a OT ie 8 EOL ET ohne ee be 
pact HRA tig ening ete ete D> PE BER eG Ey - : ROTEBS Petpibes agi larne toe 
te ae Page ; PS oe Ferereratia sie 


Tae ean hee if 
| ood te rabeh, pa oatcieainaic clades delenit ainda aioe! 
2) <)> Peete yen mPatie teins 
prtisiietine = paterk Coe Anthea wit altel itieh 
FE eee rem yugenay Siete hit Tae 
2 rake 


a ac PPE Atmel STP 
sone 
hey 


niitabenliaTj i= Bake on tsetse 
Yea Sein phen ye ho ihe Py pe R= 
A= este ihre 


Fon Pai 
w tS. 


Fema rel Lr 
La ee at peed sa 
<A Meche A nah Nt $ " 
TUG e (sole Me he PREM SeRotpely: Yo whs Hy 
Patil 5d hee ea PQ Pee » 5 img Serpre te: FED Fw Rote 
ee | eres ay oe ee 7 To ee 











Return this book on or before the 
Latest Date stamped below. A 


charge is made on all overdue 
books. 


University of Illinois Library 










AH oe orn | 
Vee Ret Fost TU TYE 


3 An 
3 = 
4. ¥ 
<j ey 
3 es Fo 
ty 
3 & 
a 
i £; as ae qc 


Nov ae wks 


JHN = & i965 


ba ryy 





MY 9- 
hs ei 
Lola APR 
~o e 
fi if 2 19GR M32 





. Vestas 


Fae ag 











‘ ¥ rs “Or 4 7 i a ‘ = y ere es 
ae om i > rh Ae ee ae , 4 
7 =I iM aS , Pa: an i en ks ba we St aes, if ‘ 5 
= » > a ry | a ° ef : y r a ! 
) Phi j re Seah ib 74%, o 5 
> : : The A rs. : “ 
; a oe a “i ee th bot ees ‘ ne ot na! 
' t 5 : Ss a; % : 
a. F : Sa. YF ie ne. 
| . a OF The | } a 
ii e ” f= ; . a _ : 7 = ‘ 
; it) ee “aah $3 “a ‘ a ir , ant 
7 y : ‘ ~ €8 &4 ue et 
—PRIVERSITY GE TLLINIS 
. iy on : 
- , =e 4 id c a: P ‘ x ha 5 : e * 2 , - 
“ As = ai P oo > y av 
a P ty oe s c : « é , AY ba 
7 t Ps m _ : 7 i. , ¢ Be! won 25 
\ a H % 2 => . ws : ; yo — Fea fr 
e = is Z a . a a i) > > , } rs 





Z4NV9 AHL WAHL AIS NOA LNOd AHM, 
66 


‘ ) 








a 4 


*¢ 
Oe Ae tt) 





bid 


‘e 


THE FOUR WINNERS 


—the Head 
—the Hands 
—the Foot 
—the Ball 


BY 
KNUTE K. ROCKNE 


AUTHOR OF “COACHING” 





NEW YORK 
THE DEVIN-ADAIR COMPANY 


Corrricut, 1925, sy 
THE DEVIN-ADAIR COMPANY 


All Rights Reserved by 
The Devin-Adair Company 


Printed in the United States of America by 
J. J. LITTLE AND IVES COMPANY, NEW YORK 





+ a . ap re rw 





'< 





<f£-a¥ <A 


AVG 13 1947 


To 
ARNOLD McINERNY 


Member of the Notre Dame football 
team. 

Killed wn action at Chateau-Thierry, 
July, 1918. 

A man whose loyalty to his school, to his 
friends and his country, whose gentlemanly 
conduct, scholarly attitude, courage .and 
conviction, and high sense of honor make 
him an ideal of which Notre Dame is justly 
proud. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER 


I 

II 
Il 
IV 
Vv 
VI 
VII 
Vill 
TX 


XI 
XII 
XIII 
XIV 
XV 
XVI 
XVII 
XVIII 
XIX 


Horrs AGLIMMER 
“TRESHIE”’ 
SCRIMMAGE 


SPRING PRACTICE 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE . 


LEARNING AT Every: TuRN . 
“Tomorrow We Must WIN” . 
Tue First Bia GAME . 


It’s ALL IN THE GAME . 


SociAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS . 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND . 
DEFEAT 

EIGHTEEN Montus ELApse 
SECRET PRACTICE . 
“INTERFERENCE” . 

THE COMEBACK. . . 
RIVALS 

A Scoutine TRIP . 

THE SCENE OF BATTLE . 


Tue GREAT GAME 


PAGE 


11 
23 
34 
46 
56 
67 
81 
91 
100 
112 
124 
133 
142 
159 
175 
185 
197 
211 
223 


THE FOUR WINNERS 


By Knuts Rockne 


CHAPTER I 
HOPES AGLIMMER 


HERE was a hushed tenseness in the air as the 
last of the boys finished tying their shoelaces or 
buckling their belts. The Springfield High School 
squad was going out to scrimmage for the last time be- 
fore the big game; today the coach was to make the 
final cut and decide the personnel for the trip. There 
were still forty men out and the coach had announced 
that after this scrimmage he would cut until only 
twenty-five remained. It was a crucial moment. 
Resolution and determination were in every gesture 
of Elmer Higgins ag he adjusted his thigh pads; there 
was a set grimness about his mouth as he tightened 
his head-piece lacing. The year previous had been his 
first on the squad and he had rather expected to be cut 
early on account of lack of experience. This year, how- 
ever, he had survived the early cut and had played for 
a minute or two in one of the first practice games. 
He had a feeling that his opportunity had not arrived 


as yet, but this afternoon he was determined that he 
1 


2 FOUR WINNERS 


would catch the eye of the coach and that when the 
train pulled out for Hillsdale he, Elmer Higgins, would 
be a member of the squad sitting with swelling chest 
in the coach while the cheering section of the student 
body down at the railroad station gave their last “nine 
rahs for the team, Team, TEAM.” 

Out on the field a few minutes later the coach lined 
his players up in three teams; but Elmer was not 
among them. He was one of the few left over and was 
to be used as a replacement man later in the scrim- 
mage. With enthusiasm undimmed, however, Elmer 
sat on the sidelines giving no thought to the scrim- 
mage but with his mind going over what particular 
plays he would use should he be called on to go in 
there and run one of the teams from the quarterback 
position. Once in a while, it is true, his thoughts 
strayed back to the scrimmage, and hazily he could see 
Hunk Hughes, dynamic halfback of the regulars, go 
slicing off tackle and now and then catapulting right 
over the line itself. After one of the pile plays there 
was a call for the doctor and the quarterback of the. 
team scrimmaging the regulars was assisted from the 
field, limping, with a badly sprained ankle. Then, 
at last, loud and clear, came the vitriolic voice of the 
coach calling, 

“Higgins, Higgins! hurry up and get in here.” 

Elmer felt that his great hour had come. He took off 
his sweat shirt in a short count and before he knew it 
was out on the field playing safety on defense. Three 
and four yards at a crash the regulars were still eating 
up the ground towards the goal line! Suddenly, on an 


HOPES AGLIMMER 3 


apparent off-tackle play, Hunk Hughes reversed his 
field and came tearing towards Elmer with all his 185 
pounds of bone and sinew. Elmer waited until he was 
just within striking distance. Then he drove at 
Hughes with every ounce of energy his mere 1385 
pounds could muster, his arms swinging wildly to 
wrap the on-coming flyer. There was a dull thud and 
Elmer knew no more until his eyes opened and he 
found himself lying on the rubbing table in the lock- 
ers. There was no one with him but old Doc Dixon, 
the local physician who always donated his services 
to the high school team. Doc smiled. 

“Well, you’ve come to, Elmer. You’re all right. 
You just got a slight concussion from meeting one of 
Hunk Hughes’ knees head-on. He’s an awfully hard 
man for a little fellow like you to tackle from the front. 
But never mind, you’re all right. I’d just suggest that 
you go home and go to bed early and don’t eat any din- 
ner, and tomorrow you'll feel as fit as ever.” 

Still feeling a bit dizzy Elmer made his way into the 
showers, took his bath, and was out again and almost 
completely dressed before the rest of the squad came 
in from the field. The first string squad stripped and 
hurried to the showers from which the noise of their 
rough play and their singing easily reached Elmer’s 
ears. When Hunk Hughes, stripped save for a towel, 
came along Elmer could not help but admire his won- 
derful physique. Powerful legs, slender waist, deep 
chest, massive shoulders, this young giant had all the 
life and spring of a cat and withal a facial expression 
that denoted bulldog courage and fearlessness. 


4 | FOUR WINNERS 


“Tough luck, boy,” said Hunk pausing for a second, 
“Y’m sorry I hurt you.” 

“Oh, that’s all right,” Elmer replied, “it’s all in the 
game. I should have had more sense than to try to 
tackle head-on a player of your power and ability.” 

Hunk continued on his way the expression of his face 
showing he was not displeased with Elmer’s honest 
compliment. 

Many thoughts flashed through Elmer’s mind as he 
sat there, still a little done up, waiting for the all- 
important list to be posted. Why did he always get 
such breaks? None of the other quarterbacks could 
have done any better than he had done if forced to 
tackle the redoubtable Hunk out in the open all by 
themselves. Why didn’t he get a chance to run the 
team on offense so that he could show the coach some 
of the uncanny generalship, some of the choice plays 
based on a straight analysis of conditions that he was 
perfecting in hisown mind? He would have used these 
plays in such sequence that the coach would have 
found that Maddocks, the left tackle, was weak against 
plays to the inside while the big right tackle, Mac, 
though a terror on close plays, was weak against plays 
to his outside. Both of these men had a tendency to 
play out of position and Elmer felt sure he could have 
easily shown the coach these points by gaining ground 
against their weaknesses. Besides helping the team as 
a whole, this also would have helped him in securing 
that recognition which he felt was his due because of 
this knowledge of the game, based on close observation 
and study. Well, he might still have a chance; the 


HOPES AGLIMMER 5 


coach might have at least admired the courageous way 
in which he unflinchingly dove at Hunk; his name 
might still be on the list when it appeared. He hadn’t 
given up hope yet, by any means. 

Just at this moment in stepped the coach himself, a 
bull-dozing, swaggering sort of fellow who had no re- 
spect for the points of view or rights of others and who 
got results mostly by ruthlessly driving the young 
charges under him. Fear was the one thing he im- 
planted, and a shiver ran down Elmer’s back as he saw 
that the eye of the coach had caught him. 

“You may look very pretty in a squad picture, young 
man,’ the coach sang out sarcastically, “but it takes 
guts to play this game, you know, and I’m afraid you 
haven’t got it.” 

Elmer winced. Was it courage, was it nerve, the 
coach meant? 

“Furthermore,” the harsh, rasping voice went on, 
“vou are too small. This is a game of bone and muscle. 
It was never got up for little fellows like you. Turn in 
your suit tonight and be sure there’s nothing missing.” 

So the blow had come! Dull, listlessly, and with 
lead in heart and feet, Elmer made his way homeward 
that evening. Gone was the fire of nervous energy. 
which had warmed his entire being all that fall. All 
the ambitions of his stout heart and clean mind were 
crumpled; he felt down and out and all the more so 
since he dreaded meeting his father after such a failure. 
His father had warned him against playing football and 
had told him it was a game only for boys with strong 
backs and weak minds. He had told his father that 


6 | FOUR WINNERS 


he was wrong, that the game was one requiring brains, 
and, braggart-like, he had even said that he himself 
was the “brains” that was going to make the Spring- 
field High School team feared throughout the state. 
And now here he was,—dropped, finished, done for! 
His bitterness of heart was all the deeper because he 
felt that he had been dropped without cause, without 
having been given even a fair chance. What would 
his father say? 

His father who conducted a modest law practice in 
the town was already home when Elmer got there. 
Glumly, and without a word, the boy ate his dinner, 
_ then helped his mother clear the dishes off the table. 
He told her of his misfortune easily enough; it was 
never hard to tell his mother anything. And the kindly 
sympathy she gave him was an opiate to his frayed and 
high strung nerves. She understood. She always did. 
But his father 

When, finally, he went into the living room and hesi- 
tatingly told old Mr. Higgins what had happened his 
father gave him a brisk answer. 

“That’s fine,’ he said. ‘Now your career is all in 
front of you and it won’t be cluttered up by any funny 
notions about playing football. If you had made the 
team I had made up my mind not to send you to col- 
lege. Now, however, I intend you shall go to my old 
school, Dulac University, and study law under my old 
friend, Professor Noon. I have had some correspond- 
ence with him about it already and he has kindly of- 
fered to get a job for you sweeping in the law building; 





HOPES AGLIMMER 7 


that will pay part of your expenses; I’ll take care of the 
rest. Your grandfather before you was a lawyer who 
never had the benefit of a college education. I worked 
my way through Dulac University and I intend that 
you shall have the same opportunity.” | 
“But Dad,” the now thoroughly downcast Elmer re- 
plied, apparently not at all enthused over the prospect 
of going to college, “won’t I be able to go out for the 
Varsity football team at Dulac?” 
Mr. Higgins took off his glasses and while he wiped 
them with his handkerchief appeared deep in thought. 
“Well,” he said finally, “if you can’t make the little 
Springfield High School squad on account of your size 
I guess you won’t last long at Dulac. But I presume 
you'll be more satisfied if you go out there and wear 
one of their suits a few afternoons, so, all right. But 
don’t forget, youre going to Dulac to learn to be a 
lawyer, not a pugilist, and if some big fellow there hap- 
pens to smack you like Abner Hughes’ boy did this 
afternoon don’t write home to me for sympathy.” 
Late the following Saturday afternoon news came 
over the wire that Springfield High had triumphed over 
little Hillsdale by a margin of one touchdown. Down 
at the corner drug store there were rumors of some 
great ball carrying by Hunk Hughes, playing that had 
more than offset a clever passing attack of Hillsdale’s 
which at times had threatened to sweep Springfield off 
its feet. Hunk had proven himself more than a team 
and in the second half the heavy and powerful Spring- 
field squad had worn out the light Hillsdale line and 


8 FOUR WINNERS 


in the last quarter had swept their way through for the 
winning touchdown. 

There was joy and sorrow in Elmer’s heart at the 
news. There was joy for the school, and the team, and 
there was joy for Hunk, because he liked Hunk,—he 
was a good sport. There was sorrow, too, because of 
the credit everyone would now give Coach Smith for 
this victory. In his heart of hearts Elmer felt that 
Coach Smith was not a good coach but merely lucky 
in having on the squad such a great boy as Hunk 
Hughes as well as others of almost equal ability. 

Elmer took little interest in the rest of the season 
even though Springfield won all its games and in a 
post-season contest captured the championship of the 
state from the big metropolitan team which had here- 
tofore been unbeatable. He didn’t attend the banquet 
given by the Kiwanis Club and the other citizens of 
Springfield in honor of the championship team and 
Coach Smith. His father who was a Kiwanian 
urgently invited him to attend but Elmer didn’t feel 
in his heart that he could enjoy it; he just pleaded a 
sick headache as his excuse,—and stayed home. 

The rest of the winter he spent in hard study. But 
his studies were not confined to his school books. He 
read with avidity all the technical books written on 
football by college coaches that he could lay hands on, 
and at night spent hours with pencil and paper dia- 
gramming strategic maneuvres to be used at critical 
moments in imaginary games. He played them out on 
the paper in every imaginable detail but of course from 


HOPES AGLIMMER 9 


a purely hypothetical point of view. Come what might 
he couldn’t give up football altogether. 

That winter Elmer and Hunk Hughes became very 
fast friends and when Hunk told him that next fall he 
was going to State University Elmer did his best to 
try to talk Hunk out of that idea telling him all the 
superior benefits to be derived from four years at 
Dulac. Old Abner Hughes was a State man, however, 
and Hunk told Elmer that if State was good enough for 
his dad it was good enough for Hunk, and furthermore 
that State, now in a period of athletic depression, 
needed someone to bring their team up where it would 
once more be the pride of State’s alumni. So the two 
boys chummed it together, victor and vanquished, big 
fellow and little, in school and out, the burden of their 
common interest and most of their talk being football. 
Whichever way they would go, together or separately, 
their hearts were one in their love for the great game. 

The following summer Elmer got a position driving 
a laundry truck in town. In the early twilight of the 
evenings he would spend hour after hour throwing 
passes in the vacant lot to some of the younger boys 
who lived in the neighborhood. Hunk, who also lived 
nearby, came over occasionally and did some punting 
with him. He was always tactful and sympathetic in 
criticising some of the technique in Elmer’s method of 
throwing the ball and always ready to praise him but 
all the time he honestly felt that Elmer could never 
“make it.” He was too small, too light. 

“Don’t be too disappointed if you don’t stay on the 
squad your Freshman year,” he said one evening. “It’s 


10 FOUR WINNERS 


just possible, you know, that you’re a little too small 
for college football.” 

And so “little Elmer,” little only in his short stature 
and light 185 pounds made ready for his college career. 


CHAPTER IT 
“FRESHIB” 


ULAC UNIVERSITY was quite different from 
what Elmer had expected. He was surprised to 
find such a beautiful campus and felt a tingle of enthu- 
siasm at the thought of spending four years among 
Iekiese ivy-covered buildings, under this canopy of beau- 
\tiful elms and maple trees which lined the walks run- 
jning around the rectangle and sheltered the various 
buildings. The whole atmosphere of the place seemed 
|to be one of enthusiastic activity, alive with the hailing 
voices, the greetings and handshaking of the upper 
iclassmen who had not seen each other during the sum- 
‘mer. Everybody hailed everybody else and it seemed 
‘to Elmer as though the very sight of the college men 
\walking around the campus gave him a friendly entrée 
|to the big fraternity of Dulac men. 
_ There was talk in the various groups about class 
leaders and social activities and the schedule of classes; 
Jand there was the usual lining up for places to eat and 
‘the securing of living rooms in the dormitories. There 
jwere also serious discussions as to “How about the 
‘team?” Everybody seemed worried about the rumor 
that Captain Lefty Latham might not return. 
‘Wouldn’t Coach Brown have a terrible time trying to 


nl his place if such a rumor became a reality? 
11 














12 FOUR WINNERS 


Elmer’s nerves were all alive——would the time ever 
come when the campus gossipers would worry whether 
or not he would return some fall? That would be sop 
enough to satisfy the vanity of anybody. And, by 
George, he was going to surprise the wiseacres back in 
Springfield and his kind father, too, but most of all he 
was going to surprise the man for whom he cherished a 
keen dislike——Coach Smith of the home high school. 

The tedious details of registering being over, Elmer 
found somewhat to his disgust that the first year of 
study in his law course would be entirely what was 
called Pre-Law; that is, English, Latin, Philosophy, 
History and Politics. He had hoped to get away from 
the monotony of this sort of curriculum and to jump 
right into the study of law itself. However, he was 
told that he would have to spend one year at Pre-Law 


before taking up the technical subjects themselves. He 


was also listed for Physical Training but was told that 
if he made the Freshman football squad he would be 
excused from Physical Training during that period. 
“When will the call for the Freshman squad come 
out?” he inquired of his next door neighbor after they 
had started an acquaintanceship by bumping into each 


other in the process of getting their trunks into their 
rooms. But his next door neighbor knew even less 
about Dulac affairs than Elmer knew aM was plainly 


in the same state of bewilderment. 
That evening, his first day complete with a full 


schedule of classes, Elmer picked up the college daily 
and there in the headlines was the announcement that 
the Varsity football squad was to report for equipment 


La RE nl 


2? 
ba 


ea @ 


elon tae 
rhe 





AYOLOIA OL AVM BAHL NO 















“FRESHIE” 13 


on the fourteenth so as to start practice on the fif- 
teenth. He thrilled even at the sight of these mo- 
mentous words. Then, in the announcement a little 
lower on the page in type not so heavy, he found in- 
structions that highly interested him. All Freshman 
candidates were to report at the gymnasium on the 
fifteenth for equipment so as to be ready for practice 
on the sixteenth. The time set was three o’clock and 
Elmer began at once to arrange his plans so as to be 
sure to be there on the dot. He immediately saw Pro- 
fessor Noon, his father’s friend, about his work and 
the kindly professor took him in hand and showed him 
what rooms were to be swept out every day. As 
Elmer’s classes lasted until three o’clock and as he con- 
fided in the professor his ambition to go out for the 
Freshman football team he received permission to do 
his work after dinner every night and he was told that 
his task would not occupy more than an hour every 
evening. Elmer went to bed that night with a feeling 
that his life at Dulac had really begun. 

The scene on the fifteenth was an exciting one for 
Elmer. At three o’clock near the head of the line of a 
group of some hundred boys there he was awaiting his 
turn to receive equipment. There was considerable 
jostling and pushing but the assistant Varsity coach in 
charge kept matters in good order, assuring the boys 
that there was plenty of outfitting for everyone and 
telling them that they must take their time and their 
turn. 

“High school days are over now, you know, fel- 
lows,” he reminded them. ‘You’re college men now.” 


14 FOUR WINNERS 


Elmer received an unwelcome surprise when he dis- 
covered that the equipment handed to him must have 
been worn by some Dulac Varsity man a century or 
more ago; the stockings and jersey had holes in them; 
the pants were too long; the shoes were not of a kind 
particularly conducive to speed. Elmer started to pro- 
test and to point toward some new pants in the corner 
but the upper classman in charge of the supplies 
scarcely noticed him, dryly remarking for the benefit 
of all: 

“Take what you get and be glad. Freshmen don’t 
get much around here except abuse.” 

Of course that silenced Elmer’s protests. He was 
more satisfied when he noticed that the other Fresh- 
men were all similarly equipped in old castoff suits, 
though he thought to himself that if he were in charge 
of equipping, those men who had enough ambition and 
energy to go out for the team would be treated with a 
little more courtesy and favor. 

Next afternoon about the same hour Barry, the 
Freshman coach, called the rookies together. He gave 
them a sound man-to-man talk every word of which 
Elmer took in seriously, though he could not help 
smiling to himself when the coach told them that above 
all they must forget everything they ever learned on 
the high school gridiron because “whatever football 
you learned there was wrong.” 

“Smith of Springfield,” said Elmer to himself, “I 
wish you could be here for this.” However, he thought 
the statement a bit sweeping and rather unfair to men 
who coached high school teams like Hillsdale, for he 


“FRESHIR” 15 


had heard it said more than once that Hillsdale was as 
well coached as most college teams. 

“Also,” the coach went on, “I don’t want any fellow 
out there to think he is better than anybody else. 
Football consists primarily of tackling and blocking 
and nobody can make this team if all he can do is carry 
the ball, forward pass or punt. 

“Tf a man can do these things he must be willing to 
go out and do the unselfish, mediocre work of blocking 
and tackling; these are the backbone of the game. If 
there are any of you spoiled high school stars here who 
don’t want to learn how to block and tackle turn in 
your suits tonight; you can’t make the team here. 
Furthermore, I want only men out here who can think; 
if there are any among you who are rattle-brained, or 
a little dull mentally you’d better get over it or get out. 
We can’t use that sort. We can use only those who 
come out here with a clear mind and with a mind which 
can concentrate on a subject with some sign of durabil- 
ity, say for an hour or two anyhow.” 

The coach paused to let that sink in; the Freshmen 
all looked self-conscious and for a fleeting second Elmer 
felt as if he were himself the dullest fellow that had 
ever breathed. 

“And there’s another thing,” the coach continued 
giving the young greenhorns another shock, “you 
Freshmen aren’t going to get an awful lot of coaching 
this fall. You'll be too busy acting as shock absorbers 
for the Varsity. You'll be allowed two games away 
from home but these games will be merely incidental; 
your big job will be to scrimmage the Varsity, not only 


16 FOUR WINNERS 


on defense, but to learn each week the plays of the par- 
ticular team which the Varsity plays the following 
Saturday and to scrimmage against the regulars for all 
you are worth. 

“There won’t be any glory in it this fall—nothing 
but hard work, abuse and grief.” He paused again. 
“However,” he went on, “those men who do their job 
well this fall will be awarded by Coach Brown on my 
recommendation, a numeral jersey. Besides that, you 
will have had the satisfaction of having done a man’s 
work well and of having helped to better prepare your- 
selves to try out for the Varsity in your Sophomore 
year.” 

The entire squad of more than one hundred men was 
now cut up into small groups and first put through 
some setting-up exercises before practicing the stunts 
of falling on and picking up the ball. The man in 
charge gave a clear cut picture of how the thing should 
be done and often his remarks to the men as they tried 
to fulfill his instructions, unsuccessfully, were sharp 
and sarcastic, Elmer coming in for his full share of this 
sort of verbal discipline. 

“Fall around the ball, not on it! Keep your eye on 
the ball; don’t.be afraid to leave your feet. You must 
be married and worrying about your wife and family 
the way you save yourself! 

“Bend down and pick up the ball like athletes; don’t 
pick it up like an old man ninety years old. Bend at 
the knees and waist. You’re not doing a one-step with 
a flapper!” 

After half an hour of this kind of work the squad 


“FRESHIE” 17 


was again divided; the linemen were taken over to one 
side and shown the various stances of the positions. 
But Elmer, with all the others who had declared them- 
selves backfield candidates, was put into another group, 
and this, in turn, divided into backfields, received two 
simple plays to run off. The skeleton team in each 
group consisted of the backfield and the center only. 
The two plays were fullback through guard and half- 
back inside of tackle. They ran these plays until 
Elmer, for one, was sick and tired of them; but just 
then the head Freshman coach lined them all up, asked 
for volunteers to punt, and set them at taking turns 
going down the field covering these kicks. That was 
some relief but at 5:30 the Freshmen were all glad to 
make their way back to the Gym. 

That evening Elmer dropped in next door to see his 
neighbor. Joe Ruggles was his name; he came from a 
large city in another state. 

“T don’t think much of this Freshman-Varsity foot- 
ball out here,” he told Elmer. “Looks to me as though 
we are going to take a lot of beatings and I don’t think 
we are going to learn very much.” 

“Well, I don’t know,” said Elmer, “I don’t care par- 
ticularly how much we do learn; the only thing I am 
concerned about is whether or not all of us will get a 
chance. There are a hundred of us out there and there 
isn’t anybody any smaller than I am.” 

Ruggles, a strapping fellow of 180 pounds, good- 
naturedly smiled. “Well, I guess when they cut they 
won't cut out a boy of my size. But I’ve heard this, 
that Head Coach Brown of the varsity is looking for 


18 FOUR WINNERS 


brains and I guess if you can show him brains you'll 
get along all right.” 

“I hope so,’-Hhwer answered; but he wasn’t very 
hopeful. “The trouble is Coach Brown won’t pay much 
attention to the Freshmen. It looks to me as though 
our staying or not staying on the Freshman squad will 
be entirely up to Mr. Barry. He’s going to handle the 
Freshman team this fall and the point I’m interested 
In is, will Barry have time in sorting over these hun- 
dred men to look for brains? If they go through the 
same stunts they did in high school simply picking 
those fellows who look the best physically, and who hit 
the dummy harder, I don’t believe I'll get any more 
chance here than I did back at Springfield.” He then 
confided to Joe his experiences on the Springfield High 
squad, and the bitterness of heart he experienced at the 
hands of Coach Smith. He also told him of his hopes 
and ambitions and of the amount of time he had put 
into studying strategy, and modestly remarked that 
he thought he could forward pass as well as the aver- 
age freshman in college. Joe Ruggles was very sym- 
pathetic and it was evident that Elmer and he were 
going to become fast friends. The two boys, by their 
antithetical natures, complemented each other; Rug- 
gles admiring the high strung, fiery, nervous disposi- 
tion of Elmer while Elmer admired the genial, good- 
natured, happy-go-lucky disposition of big Joe. 

The next afternoon the Freshmen were assembled at’ 
3:30 and they were all sent down covering kicks for a 
little while. Barry, the Freshman coach, then ordered 
everyone down to the tackling dummy. Here they 


“FRESHIB” 19 


were shown how to tackle a dummy both from the front 
and from the side. And here, too, the particular points 
about “leg drive, eyes open, head back, and meeting 
the dummy squarely with the shoulder” were all enu- 
merated. The dummy was very hard and after each 
tackle each player had the sand from the pit running 
down the innermost recesses of his suit, making every 
one of the boys feel decidedly uncomfortable. 

After an hour of this work they were lined up again 
in skeleton backfields and given three more plays which 
they were told were plays which had been used the pre- 
vious year by Kingston, the first big eleven the Varsity 
was to meet that fall. 

The rest of the week and the first of the following 
week was spent in rudimentary and fundamental work. 
The following Wednesday Coach Barry began scrim- 
mage between the various Freshman teams so as to 
enable him to make his cuts and pick the men who were 
to scrimmage the Varsity the following Saturday. 
Wednesday, Thursday and Friday afternoons as these 
Freshman elevens scrimmaged up and down the field 
they looked to Elmer like so many mobs. Some knew 
their signals and some didn’t. Some knew their as- 
signments, but most of them didn’t. There was no 
attempt made to use any tactics in strategy; it was 
merely a matter of calling a play regardless of position 
or down, and trusting to luck that it might go. The 
team Elmer ran on Friday had two backs who seemed 
to know their positions fairly well but the third, a right 
halfback named Durley, seemed to have no idea what 
it was all about. As a result Elmer kept calling the 


20 FOUR WINNERS 


play in which Durley carried the ball and Durley made 
some big gains while the rest of the team did some 
fairly good interfering and blocking. 

To Elmer’s intense surprise, when the list was posted 
that night, giving the names of the thirty-six Freshmen 
to remain on the Freshman-Varsity squad, he found 
that of the eleven men who were scrimmaging with him 
only his name and that of Durley remained on the list. 
Feeling a certain sense of elation as he wended his way 
back to the dormitory with Ruggles he could not, how- 
ever, help but voice his dissatisfaction with the unfair- 
ness of Freshman Coach Barry giving credit to the man 
Durley who carried the ball because there was nothing 
else he could do out there. 

“Tt looks to me,” remarked Elmer to Ruggles who 
was now nicknamed “Rip” because of the slashing way 
he played guard on defense, ‘‘as though we have an- 
other one of those master minds coaching our Fresh- 
man team. Here he goes and gives me credit for good 
judgment in using my best back Durley on the weak 
point of the other team, when as a matter of fact it 
was the only play that would work because Durley 
simply didn’t know what to do or how to do anything 
when he wasn’t carrying the ball. It was the only 
thing I could do if we hoped to gain any ground and 
the other two backs who ran such splendid interference 
out there had their work entirely overlooked.” 

“Well,” Ruggles answered, “they can get a lot of ex- 
perience playing on one of the intramural teams this 
fall, and if they have any stuff in them they’ll have 


“FRESHIE” 21 


plenty of chance to show it next spring when the head 
coach gets them out for spring football.” 

 Saturday’s classes at Dulac were over at noon. On 
the following Saturday after lunch Rip, Elmer and 
several of their classmen sat up in Elmer’s room and 
discussed the coming scrimmage with the Varsity. 

“Tt’s a good thing Lefty Latham got back today,” 
said one of the Freshmen ends. 

“Why?” asked Ruggles. | 
“Well, one of the fellows overheard one of the Var- 
sity coaches say that they had nobody at all to fill his 

place at center.” 

“Yes,” said another, “and they say Lefty Latham 
has been one half the line by himself for the last two 
seasons; it certainly is a big boost for the Varsity to 
get him back again. They lost four of last year’s regu- 
lars by graduation.” 

“Well, even with Lefty Latham out of there,” said a 
third freshman, “I dread to think of the scrimmage 
this afternoon; the Varsity will surely give us a terrible 
going over. They’ll all be out there trying to make a 
showing in front of the coaches; they’re figuring on 
that Kingston trip. If anybody thinks this is going to 
be a tea party I’m afraid he’s going to be sadly mis- 
taken.” 

“Those Kingston plays look pretty good to me,” said 
Elmer, “and we ought to gain some ground; but shucks, 
what am I going to do if they put me in charge of a 
team with Durley at halfback? We won’t be able to 
do anything unless I give Durley the ball continually.” 

“Tf I were you,” said Rip, “I’d give the other fellows 


22 FOUR WINNERS 


the ball and then the coach will see Durley’s a poor 
interferer, and messes things up most of the time.” 

“T’ll try it,” said Elmer, “but I’m afraid the coach 
will put all the blame on the ball carrier and probably 
won’t even notice that Durley isn’t taking out his 


end.” 


CHAPTER III 
SCRIMMAGE 


HE scrimmage that afternoon proved the most ex- 
citing experience Elmer had as yet had at Dulac. 
The first string Varsity was able to score just once 
against the first Freshman team opposing them, Rip 
Ruggles doing some beautiful bull work in the defen-. 
sive Freshman line, stopping play after play at different 
parts of the field, plays which aimed at two or three 
positions from where he was playing. Elmer got in 
with the third string Freshman team, late in the after- 
noon, against the third string Varsity; and sure 
enough, just as he had feared, Durley was assigned to 
right halfback on his team. On the few occasions on 
which the Freshmen got the ball Elmer called on 
Credon at left half to carry it, and on each occasion 
Credon was thrown for a loss or no gain, because Dur- 
ley proved totally incompetent in the task of handling 
the defensive end of the Varsity. Whenever this hap- 
pened, Elmer would drop back on the fourth down, 
himself, in the absence of a better punter, and boot the 
ball down the field thirty-five yards to the Varsity. 
About the fourth time the Freshmen got the ball Elmer 


for the first time called the play in which Durley car- 
| 23 





24 FOUR WINNERS 


ried the ball off-tackle, and because Credon knocked 
the defensive right end flat on his back, Durley went 
for ten yards before he was down. | 

“That’s the play you should have used long ago,” 
said Coach Barry. “Durley seems to be about the only 
freshman we have that can advance the ball with any 
consistency. Now go ahead and continue to use him 
and we may be able to score on the Varsity.” 

Elmer was disgusted, but he obeyed and said noth- 
ing, continuing to call on Durley to carry the ball 
again and again, either inside or outside of tackle, 
and because the Freshman left end and Credon ran 
some fine interference, Durley invariably was able to 
gain ground. ! 

On his way into the Gym after the scrimmage, El- 
mer felt himself boiling over when he heard Coach 
Barry telling one of the student reporters that the 
feature of the Freshman play that afternoon, besides — 
the remarkable playing of Ruggles, was the all-around 
playing of Durley, right halfback. | 

That evening Elmer had another half hour chat with 
Ruggles and some other freshmen in Rip’s room. EI- 
mer vehemently gave tongue to his disgust with Coach 
Barry for giving the credit to Durley, who was at best 
just an ordinary player. | 

“You can figure,” said Elmer, “that all the spectators 
would give Durley the credit, but you would think a_ 
coach, at least, would give credit where it is due.” 

“Oh, let’s forget it, and play a round of whist,” said _ 
Rip, “we haven’t anybody to beat this fall anyway. 
The two games we have are unimportant and we’ll just — 


SCRIMMAGE 25 


fee the fall out there learning a lot of football and 
what difference does it make who gets the credit?” 
“That’s all well and good,” said Elmer, “but if the 
Varsity team is coached on the same principle, I’ll be 
very, very much disappointed and I might even be 
melined to think that my father was right.” 

The succeeding weeks found Durley moved up to the 
frst string halfback on the Freshman team, while 
“lmer continued to fill in at third string, which meant 
‘chat he got in only now and then, and always with just 
1 makeshift outfit. However, he was learning a lot 
football every time the Freshmen scrimmaged the 





Varsity, as the Varsity was beginning to work like a 
vell-oiled machine and the Varsity quarterback, Shorty 
Dunne, was certainly nothing else but a field general. _ 
| Elmer enjoyed watching Dunne look over the Fresh- 
nan team and, down after down, pick out the vari- 
us weaknesses which cropped out, and go driving a 
lay to the spot where the Breshinen least expected it. 

f the Freshman center got pulling out too fast, zing! 
n the next play there was a delayed line play, ene 
brough the Freshman center for fifteen yards. When 
he Freshman tackles moved in too tight Dunne went 
utside them, and when they widened he drove through 
aside of them. When one of the Freshman guards, 
1 his enthusiasm to help the other side of the line, 
julled out of his position he must have been stricken, 
dr on the next play, as he repeated the same stunt, 

e found the Varsity fullback sprinting through the 
ole which he had just left vacant. When the Fresh- 
ian fullback started going up a little too close to stop 
i 








26 FOUR WINNERS 


the line plunges, they completed a nice little forward 
pass over his head, and because the rule in football is 
that a team with the ball should never forward pass 
on the first down, Shorty Dunne threw a long forward 
pass for a touchdown to one of the ends who was able 
to get past the Freshman halfback because he appar- 
ently reasoned that no forward pass could possibly be 
made on the first down and came tearing in as soon as 
the play started. Dunne took no unnecessary chances, 
seemed to weigh his values carefully, and as far as 
Elmer could see made no mistakes. 

The whole Varsity team seemed to have a neti 
poise so fine and so disconcerting to the Freshmen, that 
in the third week the resistance to the Varnes had 
dropped to a low ebb. , 

“We can’t stop these fellows,” said one of the Presi 
men halfbacks, “they know too much.” 

“They sure do,” Elmer chimed in. “If your shoul 
ders are set for one thing they certainly will always 
give you the other thing. What we ought to do is to 
be alert for everything and not commit ourselves to any 
one thing.” 

“Yes,” said the halfback, “but Coach Barry standl 
behind us and hollers, ‘look out for a forward pass, and 
when we drop back the Varsity pulls an end run on 
us and Bary instead of taking the blame himself puts 
it on us.” 

The night before the team left to play the first big 
game at Kingston was the occasion for a tremendous 
rally around the big bonfire on the Varsity field. It 
was Elmer’s first real taste of Dulac spirit in full action. 


SCRIMMAGE 27 


Yoach Brown and his assistants sat up on the stage 
vith the entire team and some old grads who had re- 
urned especially for this forensic feast. The entire 
tudent body and several members of the faculty were 
athered in the stands close in front. The band played 
Alma Mater” and the students gave all the yells with 
uch a gusto that Elmer, yelling with the rest, felt his 
eins tingle. The head of the student board then 
‘epped on the platform and introduced the various 
oeakers. 

The first speaker was the chairman of the faculty 
card, a dignified old professor, who remarked about 
ne thrills he always got on an occasion of this sort, and 
n the fact that he felt confident the Dulac boys would 
phold all the fine traditions of sportsmanship, courage 
od fair play that had always characterized Dulac 
tams. He paid tribute to the boys on the team, said 
iey were above the average as students and praised 
lem as gentlemen and as representatives of Dulac. 
The next speaker was a wealthy alumnus from Chi- 
\go, a@ prominent attorney, who took the crowd 
rough twenty years of the history of football at Du- 
¢, starting back with the days of the famous Red 
ish and bringing his memoirs up to the present. This 
d grad made a great hit with the boys, particularly 
jen he implored them to be sure to wallop Kingston 
cause his law partner was a Kingston man and he 
serted there would be no living or working with him 
. Kingston won. His remarks made Elmer think of 
h dad at home, himself a Dulac man who had never 
i the spirit of the old school. 








28 FOUR WINNERS 


The third speaker was an assistant coach who was 
extremely bashful and whose few remarks were simply 
to the effect that he was very glad to be back helping 
to get the team ready for another year. 

Freshman Coach Barry, Elmer’s chief, then spoke, 
He was proud, he said, of the part he and the Fresh- 
men squad had played in developing the Varsity and 
some of the upper classmen started a round of applause: 
at that. “More Dulac spirit,” Elmer said to himself 
with a thrill. 

Head Coach Brown of the Varsity was then intro- 
duced. He confined himself to a few words regarding 
the strength of Kingston and the weakness of Dulac, 
his remarks being received with a good deal of appre- 
clative laughter. Kingston’s, he said, was a very good 
team; but Dulac’s was a team of fighters; and the 
game wouldn’t be over until the final whistle was heard. 
He got a cheer on that. | 

The final speaker was Lefty Latham, Varsity cap- 
tain and center, whose appearance was awaited with a 
tense interest as this was probably the first public 
speech of his lifetime. Lefty arose very much flus- 
tered. He floundered around with a few remarks about: 
not having any team if it wasn’t for the student body 
and then, in his nervousness, becoming just a little in-' 
coherentihe said: 

lt seu students do your part then I'll do the best 
we can.’ 

Which simple announcement was received with the: 
loudest spontaneous yell that Elmer had ever heard in) 
all his young life. K 


SCRIMMAGE 29 


The entire meeting was one of thrills and enthusiasm 
iand as the gathering arose at the finish, and, accom- 
‘panied by the band, sang the “Victory March” of old 
Dulac, Elmer felt his very heart swell with the spirit of 
loyalty and determination to give his best forever and 
forever, to make “Dulac win,—forever and forever.” 
The Freshmen squad received a few days rest while 
ithe Varsity was away. Saturday afternoon all the 
(aaa went downtown to get the returns of 
the game with Kingston. Dulac’s victory is now a mat- 
ter of history but there were probably no prouder men, 
Ler on the Varsity itself, than Elmer and Rip that 
night as they walked back to school and recounted to 
one another their good fortune in being part of such an 
institution, and in particular a part of the athletic 
organization which had so many noble traditions, tradi- 
tions which they were now daily living up to. The 
two boys felt lifted up with a reverence and enthusiasm 
for Dulac. 

_ Every day that fall was chuck full of memorable in- 
cidents for Elmer but probably the greatest event inso- 
far as he was concerned, was when he got into play the 
last quarter of a game against a neighboring Normal 
school. The Freshmen were hopelessly outclassed by 
the heavy Normal team, and Coach Barry, evidently 
foreseeing that there was no chance to win, put in all 
the players available and among these was Elmer. He 
went on to the field with every nerve “pointed” and 
with all the energy of his being set to turn the tide. 
But it was too late. The Normal team finally rolled 


| 











30 FOUR WINNERS 


up a score of 42-0 against the battered and eae ae 
Dulac Freshmen. 

The college paper reporting the game the next morn- 
ing carried a statement quoting Barry to the effect that 
the Freshmen had been too badly battered in their 
scrimmages with the Varsity to do themselves justice, 
and declared that if these boys were to play Normal 
again they would have no trouble beating that team 
_ which was described in the article as “not much good at 

its best.” 

Whatever respect Elmer had had for Coach Barry 
was dissipated when he read these alibis. 

“Tf Coach Barry had picked a few interferers and put 
them on our team instead of all ball carriers we might 
have been able to do something,” he said to Rip at 
lunch that day. Not only Rip, but every man who 
heard the remark agreed with him. It was plainly to 
be seen that Elmer Higgins was learning football the 
one and only way it can be rightly learned, scientific- 
ally, by the head. | 

In the last week of the season the Varsity did noth- 
ing but light work and the Freshman squad was dis- 
missed for the year, everyone of the men who competed 
in the game against Normal being awarded a jersey 
with a class numeral on it. Elmer felt mighty proud 
of his class numeral; but he felt sorry for Credon, one 
of the left halfbacks who had had the misfortune all 
year to be teamed with Durley and had not had a 
chance to get into the Normal game because, from 
Coach Barry’s point of view he was not good enough. 
Elmer was frank in speaking about this to Credon 


SCRIMMAGE 31 


several evenings later when he chanced to meet him on 
the quadrangle, but Credon seemed to honestly think 
he really wasn’t much good and that. the coach was 
right. 

“A coach is a coach, you know,” he said. “He does 
the thinking.” 

“Yes,” Elmer answered, “but no football team would 
ever win if the players themselves didn’t think, too.” 
There was not a grain of the mutinous or rebellious in 
him, but he hated to see a man like Credon discounted 
by the mistakes of others. 

All the Freshmen football men joined the track 
squad during December but Elmer’s thoughts were 
mostly on his studies and on going home for Christmas. 
His letters home were full of that now. He didn’t say 
much about football. Early in the fall he had, of 
course, written to his dad that he had made the Fresh- 
men team but his father’s response had been a little 
dampening. 

“The Freshman class this year at Dulac must be a 
little under par,” he had written, “and the Freshman 
football team in particular must be having an off year.” 
This nettled Elmer for a minute but then it amused 
him for his satisfaction at having made the team was 
too great to be spoiled by his dad’s dry comment. He 
knew his dad! 

For the first month or so Elmer had also exchanged 
letters with Dora Spaulding, a home girl for whom he 
had had a sort of fancy since first they were thrown 
together during their high school days. But Dora had 
not answered his last two letters, so Elmer had taken 


32 FOUR WINNERS 


a particular satisfaction in writing her again, telling 
her he had made the Freshman-Varsity team. At the 
same time he told himself that girls didn’t amount to 
much anyhow; they only distracted one’s thoughts 
from one’s career. But even if Elmer had regretted the 
breakoff in correspondence he was far too busy to give 
it any thought. 

Elmer spent a very enjoyable vacation over the holi- 
_ days with the folks back in Springfield and did quite 
a bit of strutting with his numeral jersey along with 
Hunk Hughes who had been the star of the Freshman 
team at State. Chumming it once more with Hunk, 
he was having a perfectly happy time in spite of certain 
gossip going around the drug store to the effect that 
Dulac must have been short of Freshman quarterbacks 
if little Elmer Higgins could win a numeral. This re- 
mark was said to have been made by Coach Smith, who 
was still coaching Springfield High. It caused Elmer 
only to bite his lips, clench his fists and swear to him- 
self that he would yet show the town what a big dub 
this home coach was. 

Elmer’s mother, of course, was sympathetic and 
frankly proud of her boy’s achievements. From Mr. 
Higgins, however, there were at first no comments. 
whatsoever on football; he confined his conversation 
about Dulac to inquiries about Professor Noon and 
some of the other faculty members who had been there 
in his day. But one day he did ask Elmer if he should 
not feel satisfied, now that he had made his Freshman 
numeral,— warning him against getting any false no- 
tions about going out for the Varsity team. To this 


| 
| SCRIMMAGE 33 
(Elmer only responded that he meant to go out in the 
spring for exercise anyway if for nothing else; and 
there the subject was dropped between them. In his 
heart, nevertheless, Elmer knew he was going out there 
determined to give his right arm, if necessary, to 
achieve his goal. 

Returning to school after the holidays Elmer set- 
tled down with Rip to plug and study hard for the 
midyear examinations which were coming on soon. A 
few days after school reopened Coach Brown called a 
special meeting of the Freshman football squad and 
talked to the players for the first time. His remarks 
were short and to the point. 

“I don’t care how fine a football player any of you 
boys may be,” he said, “you are no good to the school 
or to me if you don’t keep up in your classes. You 
might just as well be over playing with Kingston or 
South Square, our two biggest rivals, as to be going 
to school here if you are not keeping up in your work. 
So, if you are up, stay up; if you are down, get up.” 

















CHAPTER IV 
SPRING PRACTICE 


N the last week of February the mid-year examina- 
tion marks came out and several of the most prom-_ 
ising Freshmen were sent home for flunking according 
to rumors Elmer heard around the campus. He and - 
Rip had passed, however, with flying colors though he 
had.a close call in Latin. Naturally he was elated; and. 
the results of his up-and-coming scholastic work were 
quickly evident on the athletic field. In an open novice 
track meet held a day or two after the exams Elmer 
surprised many, including himself, by winning the- 
quarter mile in what was considered fairly good time. 
The Gym record in the quarter was fifty-two seconds; 
Elmer negotiated the distance in fifty-four and one- 
fifth seconds. 

The Varsity track coach, old Dad Moore as he was” 
called, was enthusiastic and wanted Elmer to drop 
everything else in athletics and become a runner. 
Elmer, however, told Dad that running didn’t interest 
him nearly as much as playing football and that he was 
expecting Coach Brown to give the call for spring prac- 
tice as the snow was practically all off the ground. Dad 
appeared greatly disappointed. 

“You may make the Varsity football team, even if 

34 





SPRING PRACTICE 35 


you are a little small,” he said, “but you would make 
one of the greatest runners Dulac ever had; that is if 
you put your heart into it. If you don’t make the team 
next fall will you promise me you will come out and 
work with the track team from then on?” 

Elmer promised; but he felt fairly confident that 
Dad would never have a chance to call his bluff. 

On the last day of February Coach Brown issued his 
call for all candidates for spring football which was to 
be for all freshmen interested in making the team, and 
for all upper classmen who in their hours of recreation 
were not busy with some other Varsity sport. More 
than a hundred men answered the call and were 
equipped that afternoon. The notice also carried the 
announcement that there would be a forty-five minute 
blackboard trial every evening after dinner in the 
Science lecture room. Elmer set his thoughts forward 
for all this with the keenest anticipation. 

_ Coach Brown was not out for practice the first after- 
noon scheduled and not much was done, the work con- 
sisting almost entirely of informal kicking and passing 
around the field. That night after dinner, however, 
Coach Brown addressed the boys in the Science lecture 
room and outlined the series of talks he was to give 
over a period of six weeks at the end of which he 
would give a written examination that he might check 
up on those who knew football by that time and those 
who didn’t. 

| “The first thing I am looking for this spring,” the 
coach said, “is brains. Of course you must have a little 
physique, and you must develop speed, and when the 








36 FOUR WINNERS 


scrimmage comes you must show that you have what. 
we call intestinal fortitude. | 

“However, there is always a scarcity of brains, and 
as football today is largely a contest of wits I want men 
who have them and who can use them. A lot of you 
big fellows here probably think that because you weigh 
around two hundred pounds that you’ll make the Var- 
sity in a canter next fall. You may, but you won’t do: 
it on weight alone, not by a long shot. If any of you 
are suffering from charley horse between the ears you. 
won’t even be invited to go out next fall.” : 

The coach then went into a discussion on the com- 
parison that could be made between a football team 
and an army, between warfare and football, and Elmer 
found himself deeply absorbed in this. He had never 
had football put to him in that light before. | 

“The attacking team,” said the coach, “may be 
likened to the attacking army and the defensive team 
to an army protecting its position. The line of scrim- 
mage of the attack can be used either as artillery or as 
infantry; the quarterback is the chief of staff and all 
that goes with the chief of staff. The offensive back- 
field may be likened to the cavalry and its versatility 
is increased because it can, upon a signal from the chief. 
of staff, be changed to an aeroplane squadron. | 

“On the defensive side the defensive line may also be 
called either infantry or artillery depending upon what 
kind of attack it is called upon to meet. The defensive 
backs may also be cavalrymen, bayonet men, or anti- 
aircraft men depending upon the style of attack the 
offensive is using. If the offense tries to run the ends, 


SPRING PRACTICE 37 


the line is the artillery which breaks up the formation ; 
and the secondary backs are cavalry who then come up 
and knock down the man carrying the ball. 

“Tf the offense tries a line buck or a mass play the 
defensive line is again the artillery which breaks up 
the formation, and as the lone carrier of the ball comes 
through he is picked off by the defensive backfield men 
who, in this case, may be said to be bayonet men. 

“Tn case the offensive team tries a forward pass the 

defensive team is like the infantry trying to capture the 
grounds where the hangars are before the aeroplanes 
can leave the ground; while the defensive backs are 
anti-aircraft men who try to prevent the aeroplanes 
from destroying their basic connections which is the 
same as completing a forward pass. 
“The commissary departments of both teams are 
the water boys; the secretary of war of each army is 
the head coach; while the President and his cabinet 
can be likened to the chairman of the Board of Con- 
trol and the faculty and alumni who make up this 
personnel. 

“And yet,” Coach Brown went on “although the tac- 
tics and strategy involved in football are, in a certain 
sense, similar to those used in warfare there are some 
serious differences between warfare and the game of 
football. Warfare is a serious thing in which the lives 
of thousands of brave men and the safe defense of a 
country are involved. An army, therefore, can not 
afford to take any chances. The men who control its 
destiny must at all times be careful not to unneces- 


38 FOUR WINNERS 


sarily endanger or sacrifice human life. They must 
keep the army intact for the defense of their country. 

“Football on the other hand is just a game. In 
case one of the opposing teams scores a touchdown 
there is nothing much lost. There is no irreparable 
injury done. There is nothing to prevent the other 
team from coming along later and scoring two touch- 
downs. In warfare if a man’s life is lost irreparable 
injury is done, and if an entire army is destroyed, with 
it may be lost the liberty of a nation. In football, how- 
ever, which, as I say is just a game, the two teams can 
take all kinds of chances. I don’t mean by this un- 
necessary chances, but chances in which, if the ma- 
neuver works well, a game that has been apparently 
lost may be won. In other words, a touchdown may be 
merely a means of spurring the other team to greater 
efforts so they can still come back and win the game. 

“Now, while I insist that you boys all play football 
as I coach it, I don’t want you to get the idea that 
this is the only way to play football. There are a 
dozen other good ways of playing it. This, however, 
is the only way I know, and as far as we are concerned 
it is the best way. And yet as far as outsiders are con- 
cerned, other ways may be just as good and we must 
recognize this for we have no room here for the egotism 
of the know-all sort. 

“T intend to show you how we do everything in foot- 
ball, and I intend to give you in each and every case 
a good reason why. There is no such thing as the last 
word in football. New angles to the game are crop- 
ping out continually, if any of you men have any ideas 


SPRING PRACTICE 39 


which are new don’t be afraid to express them. Only 
the jackass knows it all and brays; and only the don- 
key keeps still and lives without ideas. Be here to- 
morrow night at the same time and bring note-books 
along prepared to take notes as we cover the subject.” 

On the way back to the room Elmer and Rip dis- 
cussed the talk and agreed that if Coach Brown prac- 
ticed what he preached they would both be on the 
squad next fall, although Elmer expressed himself as 
being a little dubious, feeling that Coach Brown had 
been, in a measure any way, expressing himself along 
these lines for effect on the faculty. | 

“Well, we'll see,” said Rip. “The spring practice will 
soon tell us.” 

On the field spring football proved to be a drill in 
fundamentals; a lot of work was done in passing and 
catching passes, punting and catching punts. The as- 
sistant coaches, including some of the seniors who were 
to be graduated that June, had charge of most of the 
detail work and plugged hard trying to perfect indivi- 
dual players in personal proficiency in handling the 
ball. Coach Brown had Rip Ruggles over with the 
head line coach getting special instructions in line play, 
and for the first few weeks he seemed to ignore entirely 
the existence of Elmer as well as a few other Fresh- 
men. On this account Elmer began to feel even more 
skeptical than ever and was going over in his mind 
different schemes for trying to get recognition from 
the man in charge. He knew what he wanted and he 
knew what he could do; but it was. a tough job getting 
anyone else to see it. 


40 FOUR WINNERS 


After lecturing about a month Coach Brown began 
asking hypothetical questions of various players in the 
class which still numbered more than seventy men, 
very few having dropped out. Right through a long 
list of queries Coach Brown kept after his student- 
players for their opinions. Whenever one was stumped 
it was always Elmer who raised his hand and in most 
cases answered the question. To his surprise he no- 
- ticed the rest of the class began to show an intense dis- 
‘like of him for this reason. Even Rip remarked on it. 

“T believe I’d keep that right hand down for a while, 
Elmer,” he said. “The rest of the brothers are begin- 
ning to get a bit jealous.” 

“Let them get jealous,’ Elmer answered. “I’m de- 
termined to get recognition from Coach Brown by any 
fair means, and by foul means, too, if necessary.” And 
Rip could not help but laugh at the grim seriousness. 
of the flashy-eyed, diminutive lad whose whole being 
seemed to spell personality whenever he discussed 
football. 

“Foul means?” Rip repeated. “Oh, no, not you, 
Higgy.” 

“Well, you know what I mean,” Elmer answered 
cooling down. “I’m going to let him know that I’m at — 
Dulac this year.” 

On a Saturday night in the middle of April the 
Freshman class had its big social function of the year, 
a reception to the faculty followed by an informal | 
dance. Elmer didn’t know any girls in town but Rip 
Ruggles who had on several occasions stepped forth 
into the social whirl of the town of Dulac, volunteered 


SPRING PRACTICE 41 


to furnish a charming partner for the evening. Elmer 
was loath to accept the proffer but Rip finally per- 
suaded him that he ought to go,—it was his duty as a 
college man to try to enjoy as many activities as pos- 
sible. And so Elmer went. 

The reception was held in the University gymna- 
sium. Shortly after Elmer ran the gauntlet of the large 
receiving line of the faculty members and their wives, 
the orchestra struck up the first dance number. The 
young lady Rip had brought along as a dancing part- 
ner for Elmer proved to be a quiet, demure maiden who 
didn’t rasp on Elmer’s nerves as some of the other girls 
present would have done. Elmer had no trouble filling 
his program and didn’t pay much attention to those 
with whom the dances were exchanged. For his third 
dance, however, as he was looking around wondering 
who his partner was to be, a tall, lively-eyed slender 
girl left a crowd of students and came over to him. 

“T guess this is our dance,’ she announced. Elmer 
collected himself and their dance began. 

They swung around the room to the rhythm of the 
orchestra for a short time in silence and then the young 
lady suddenly asked: 

“Aren’t you the young man everybody is calling 
Shorty Dunne, Jr., another master mind of football?” 

Elmer felt a surge of blood to his head and knew 
that he must be presenting the appearance of a blonde, 
sunburnt in the tropics. He strove for speech but he 
couldn’t articulate. Finally his sense of humor came 
to his rescue and he laughed with his partner as he 
retorted: 


42 FOUR WINNERS 


“You can go back and tell some of those young lolly- 
poppers who prompted you to ask me this question 
that at least I have a little courage and am no quitter. 
The only quitters we have around here at Dulac are 
the fellows who never try anything but merely sit 
around and criticise.”’ 

The young lady laughed uproariously at this but 
Elmer could see nothing particularly funny in it and 
after the dance he sat over in the corner and watched 
his erstwhile partner make her report to the group. He 
spent the rest of the evening in rather surly silence, 
which must, no doubt, have greatly puzzled Estelle 
Wilson the girl whom Rip had brought for him. He 
mentioned the incident to Rip between dances but got 
no sympathy from him for Rip also thought it was a 
good joke and had a hearty laugh over it. 

Elmer took his young lady home in a cab, maintain-— 
ing a moody silence, and was scarcely more than polite 
in his departure when they arrived at the Wilson 
home. He was none too happy over his first Dulac 
social function and was beginning to feel that some of - 
the fellows, at least, decidedly had it in for him. 

Several nights after the dance as Coach Brown was 
closing his football class he asked the following 
question: 

“What would you do with first down, ten, on your 
own fifteen yard line, the score nothing to nothing, ten 
minutes left to play before the end of the game,—there 
is scarcely any wind but your punter is no better than 
the punter on the other team, and the other team 


SPRING PRACTICE 43 


presents a fairly normal defense when you line up in 
punt formation?” 

Credon, Freshman halfback, suggested a punt and so 
did most of the others who were asked. One or two 
suggested a wide end run, mostly for position to punt 
on the ensuing down. There was a pause and then 
Hlmer raised his hand. 

“Well, young man,” said Coach Brown, “what’s on 
your mind?” 

“T want to answer that question,” said Elmer. “I 
believe that by this time I would have found which of 
the three defensive backs was weak against the forward 
ia and if I found this man was a defensive man 
backing up the line I’d shoot my two ends away down 
the field as decoys. I would have the man back there 
in the back position in punt formation, and fake a 
punt, and throw a forward pass to the quarterback 
straight up the middle of the field. If the man back 
of the line is weak on passes he will get by him, but the 

ass must not be thrown so long as to go down deep 
1. the middle of the field where the last man on 
defense is waiting to receive the punt. It must be a 
fairly long pass but not too long.” 

_ There was a touch of amusement on the coach’s face 
as he listened to Kilmer’s answer, but as the bell rang 
chen, marking the time for study hour in the dormi- 
‘ories he made no comment. “We will continue this 
omorrow,” was all he said; and of course Elmer was 
lisappointed. Another chance gone! If only Coach 
3rown had said he was right. 








| 


44 FOUR WINNERS 


Just before noon the next day Rip Ruggles came 
bursting into Elmer’s room. : 

“Have you heard the news?” he fairly shouted. 

“No,” said Elmer. “What is it? Is the whole 
campus joshing me because of that answer of mine last 
pent 2). 

“Josh nothing,” said Rip, “the whole campus is 
carrying the story that Coach Brown made the remark | 
to Dad Moore that spring practice had been a distinct 
success,—that he had found the thing he had been 
looking for—brains! And the brains in the person of 
one Elmer Higgins. Congratulations, old boy, aren’t 
you just tickled to death?” 

That noon at the Commons where they ate Elmer 
noticed a changed look of respect with which the other 
students eyed him, and at the same time a certain feel- 
ing of satisfaction took hold of him as he felt that at 
last he had aroused the coveted attention of his chief 
and had passed through those stages of ridicule and 
grief through which every young fellow has to go be- 
fore he arrives. 

Spring football closed a week later with a final scrim- 
mage in which Elmer played first string quarterback 
against a picked Varsity squad and while he didn’t 
show anything brilliant, he made no mistakes and as 
far as any comment by the coaches was concerned there 
were no particular criticisms of his work. 

There was no publicity in the papers because no one 
was paying much attention to the position of quarter- 
back in spring football,—the great Shorty Dunne still 
had another year. This pleased Elmer as he dreaded 


SPRING PRACTICE 45 


publicity. He spent the rest of the spring in studying 
and taking in an occasional social affair; but his whole 
being was more or less enthused with the prospect of 
studying next fall under Coach Brown and the quarter- 
back of quarterbacks, Shorty Dunne! 


CHAPTER V 
LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE 


EVERAL weeks before the close of school Dad 
Moore met Elmer on the campus and asked him if 
he had time to drop over to his room for a little chat. 
Elmer went at once to the old man’s quarters in the 
gymnasium, a modest, well-furnished room, the walls 
of which were covered with pictures of track stars run- 
ning and jumping, besides certain medals which had 
been left there by some of his old-time performers. 
Dad was an old bachelor, a man whose life had been 
devoted to developing young men physically; besides” 
being track coach he was also trainer of the football 
team. 

“Well, young man, I guess you are lost as far as track 
athletics are concerned,” said Moore giving Elmer a 
chair. “The old man thinks pretty well of you as a 
prospective quarterback in a year or two; in fact I 
think he is counting on you to take Shorty Dunne’s 
place when he graduates.” 

Elmer blushed and modestly mumbled something. 

“What I called you over for, however,” Dad went on, 
“was to see if I could get you to act as one of my camp 
counsellors up at my summer camp in Wisconsin.” 


Dad Moore then went on to explain that every summer 
46 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE 47 


he had a camp for boys up in Wisconsin, and that he 
always took along four or five Dulac boys as counsel- 
lors. There was no salary, just the payment of all ex- 
penses. But the camp offered a glorious summer vaca- 
tion and at the same time the development that comes 
with shouldering certain responsibilities; for each of 
the eight boys in a group was directly under a counsel- 
lor and each counsellor was responsible for the life and 
limb of every one of the boys under him. 

Elmer was delighted with the opportunity and said 
he would write home for permission at once. The re- 
ply from his dad a few days later was in the affirma- 
tive, although he mentioned the fact that Elmer’s 
mother was disappointed in a way but readily gave 
her consent because she realized that it was for Elmer 
a golden opportunity. Elmer carried his father’s an- 
swer back joyously to Dad Moore and received from 
him the plans and arrangements for the camp. There 
was to be a meeting in Chicago, a farewell dinner there 
to all the parents, and then all the boys of the camp, 
the counsellors, and men in charge were to leave on a 
special train for the Wisconsin woods. These plans © 
being all settled Elmer felt a load lifted off his mind 
for the question of what he was to do during the sum- 
mer had already worried him. 

A week before the examinations in June Coach 
Brown called a meeting of all the candidates for the 
fall and gave a long talk on what he expected of the 
men during the summer. 

“T don’t want anybody to go out and work himself so 
hard he’ll come back here all worn out and under 


48 FOUR WINNERS 


weight. Neither do I think it’s a good thing for’ any 
of you young fellows to sit behind a steering gear all 
summer or suffer sore ankles from the sharp turns on 
the dance floor. 

“Tf you do these things you'll come back here so out 
of shape we never will get you in trim for football this 
fall. Rather, I expect a sort of halfway policy. 
Wherever possible I want you to go and take a rugged 
out-of-door job; do a certain amount of hard work; 
and above all, you fellows who are working your way 
through school, save all the money you can. Come 
back to school in fair shape, rugged, brown, and 
healthy, so that when practice opens on the fifteenth 
we won’t have to waste too much time on conditioning 
but can start learning right away.” 

After the meeting Coach Brown walked with Elmer 
over to his room and said he wanted to go in and have 
a chat with him. After inquiring of Elmer how he was 
doing in his classes and what he had in mind for the 
summer, the coach went on to say there was something 
on his mind that they ought to talk over; and Elmer 
could not help but feel impressed with his chief’s 
friendly and unostentatious manner. 

“T hope you haven’t got any exaggerated idea of 
yourself or your ability just because you happened to 
give some good answers in class this spring, or because 
you wrote such a fine examination paper on football,” 
Coach Brown began. “I’m rather sorry that my com- 
plimentary remarks about you got out so much because 
with some young men it might not have been taken as 
it should. Some coaches like to drive and abuse their 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE = 49 


squad continually. That may be all right but I don’t 
believe in doing it. I realize that you fellows are all 
young boys and that you are entitled to a little word of 
praise now and then as a reward for good work.” 

Elmer was silent but he felt his heart glow toward 
the “big chief” as he spoke these words. 

“However,” the coach continued, “you fellows on the 
Freshman squad have a long way to go. None of you 
are anywhere near the stage at which you might be 
called ‘nifty.’ Some of this year’s Freshmen are still 
so clumsy that whenever they cross the field they sprain 
their ankles in imaginary holes. But they have their 
good points. They are a clean, wholesome bunch of 
boys who come from good families. They have a world 
of enthusiasm and I believe they are impressed with 
the many school traditions here to which they will have 
to live up. 

“They have been executing a lot of details this spring 
rather crudely but constant repetition of these details 
will finally produce results, so that they will become 
part of their reflexes, and when all the correct ways 
of doing things become part of a man’s reflexes then, 
and only then, does he become a great player. 

“Now that is what I want to impress upon you, 
Elmer.” The coach drew some papers from his pocket. 
“Tm going to leave with you a copy of the plays for 
next fall, all diagrammed out with the signals for each 
one and I want you to practice playing hypothetical 
games with these plays all summer against six or seven 
defenses which I am also giving you on paper. If you 
do this and do it faithfully, by next fall when you are 


50 FOUR WINNERS 


playing quarterback, the instant you have analyzed a 
defense, the right play will suggest itself and you can 
adjust your choice of plays as dictated by the tactical 
situation. 

“The question of downs, number of yards to gain, 
position on the field, direction of the wind, the score, 
and time left to play must, of course, be ever present 
in the mind of every man on the team, but particularly 
in your mind, the mind of the quarterback. I know 
you'll be happy and busy with Dad Moore up there in 
the woods but you ought to systematize your day so 
that after the boys are all asleep, if you take just one 
hour a night to do these things you'll be surprised next 
fall at the way you will have developed.” 

Elmer gave Coach Brown his promise to adhere to 
this scheme and to guard as sacred the plays and sig- 
nals which had been given him. When the coach left 
him that night he was an excited, yet deeply and sol- 
emnly impressed young man. The thrill and joy of 
football had long been his, but now, for the first time, 
an abiding sense of responsibility on the team came 
to him and filled his mind. 

The morning of the last day of school was filled with 
hustle and bustle. The street cars and cabs going to 
town were loaded with students and their suitcases, 
while truck after truck went down the beautiful elm 
tree drive laden with trunks for the depot. There were 
hurried good-byes and admonitions not to fail to write 
as the jolly groups broke up and went on their various 
ways for the summer vacation. The seniors, of course, 
stayed over for the commencement exercises. 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE 51 


As the street car sped down the road the last sight 
of the school that Elmer had was a clear view of the 
Law Building which he had swept all year and which 
housed his good friend, kindly old Professor Noon. 
Now, however, his thoughts were coming one after 
another, too fast for reflection on any one thing. He 
only knew that his first year at Dulac was ended and 
that his first football dream had come true. He was 
a happy lad. 

Things went fast from that moment of leaving 
school. Two days at home with his parents; a minute 
or two with Hunk Hughes and the crowd down at 
the drug store; and before he knew it he was on his 
way to Chicago. There was a banquet there at the 
LaSalle Hotel, a jolly mixed gathering of boys going 
to camp, their parents, the camp leaders; another scene 
of hurried good-byes, and the train pulled out for 
Wisconsin. 

The site of the camp was delightful, set up on a well- 
wooded spot on the shores of a lake which proved to be 
stored with many kinds of fish. The whole atmos- 
phere of the place was exhilarating and Elmer felt 
that he was to enjoy himself to the utmost in spite of 
the fact that he had the responsibility of eight boys 
directly under his supervision. He found time in the 
evenings for work on his hypothetical football, though 
often he found it a trying task to follow up those 
studies, for the doings of the day were always strenu- 
ous and there was no time, as far as the group leaders 
were concerned, for reveries. The job of keeping the 
boys happy, contented and busy was an exacting one. 


52 | FOUR WINNERS 


There was only one incident that was outstanding 
during the summer, and that happened while Elmer’s 
group was away on a three-day canoe trip, up one 
river, across a portage and down another. The second 
stream proved to have a remarkably fast current and 
when the boys began to insist on going in swimming 
Elmer held back his consent for a while on account of a 
natural prudence. However, the youngsters were so 
enthusiastic, so determined he finally gave in; and so 
in they all went, their leader with them. 

The spot they had chosen was a beautiful, sheltered 
place where the current didn’t prove too swift. In a 
little while Elmer relaxed his vigilance and made his 
way down stream a few rods around a bend. There, on 
swimming out to mid-stream once or twice he found 
no difficulty in getting back to the dead tree limb which 
hung low over the water. 

“T’ll call the boys to come here,” he was saying to 
himself. At that moment while he was hanging on the 
limb, resting, he was suddenly startled by cries from 
the boys around the bend, above stream, and next saw 
in the water a dark object floating towards him. He 
recognized it instantly to be a human being. He was_ 
galvanized into action. He let himself down, reaching 
out as the object floated by, and, grasping it with one 
hand, hung to the branch with the other. His grip was 
firm but his heart seemed to stop beating as he recog- 
nized the unconscious figure to be one of the boys of 
his group. Calling for help to the other boys who by 
this time were running towards him he got the young 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE — 53 


lad quickly ashore; they resuscitated him in a short 
while. 

The boy said he knew nothing except that he had 
suddenly grown weak and didn’t remember what hap- 
pened immediately afterwards. None of the other boys 
had noticed him losing control of himself. It had all 
happened so swiftly that he had been caught by the 
current before they had cried their alarm. 

Lying awake that night Elmer found it hard to go to 
sleep. This brief, terrifying experience continued 
working on his mind. Perspiration broke out on him 
as he thought of the consequences had he not been for- 
tunately hanging to the tree limb, right in the path 
of the current when the boy’s body had come sweeping 
along. It brought home his responsibilities with a 
multiple effect, and on the remainder of the trip he 
“played safe,” with relentless caution, vowing to him- 
self that never again would he relax his vigilance in 
any way wherever he might be. How often Coach 
Brown had told him and his companions in their foot- 
ball lectures about “eternal vigilance.” Now, he felt, 
he knew what these words meant. 

The camp broke up the last week in August and 
Elmer hurried home to spend a week with his folks be- 
fore returning to Dulac. 

On his return to Springfield he found the whole 
town agog over the news that Coach Smith had 
been appointed head coach at State during the sum- 
mer. The pre-season dope on football, as Elmer found, 
was going full blast at the corner drug store. He met 
Hunk Hughes who had spent the summer in Spring- 


54 FOUR WINNERS 


field and he heard many things of the liveliest interest. 
to him, he had been so out of touch with things all 
summer. Among other things mentioned was a rumor 
that Dulac and State might resume athletic relations. 
in the near future. Elmer got a real thrill out of that. 

“We would surely like to play you,” said Hunk. “I 
think we’re going to have a great team at State this 
year and with Coach Smith taking hold of us I don’t 
think State will be the doormat it has been for the last 
few years.” 

Elmer said nothing but he thought a great deal. 
“Coach Smith!” he commented to himself, and there 
was scorn in the thought. He had learned much al- 
ready about what real coaching is, from his chief at 
Dulac. 

Mr. and Mrs. Higgins could see a big change in El- 
mer,—their little boy was decidedly growing up. There 
was a new air of dignity and responsibility about him 
and it was evident that he was taking life and its prob- 
lems more seriously than ever before while he was in a 
certain sense still just a boy he was immeasurably 
more mature. The year had wrought many changes 
and apparently all of them for the better. But of 
course nothing was said about all of this; the parents 
kept their thoughts to themselves, and Elmer’s father 
in fact, continued to treat him in his usual gruff, half- 
teasing way. 

When Elmer suggested that the folks come down to 
Dulac for the big game of the season with Aksarben 
all Mr. Higgins would say was that he never saw a 
game of football in his life and he was too old to see 


LEARNING FROM COACH AND LIFE = 55 


one now. However, when Mrs. Higgins saw how dis- 
appointed Elmer was at this she confided before he 
left for school, that his father had whispered to her 
that both of them might be down for the game after 
all. 

And so Elmer went back to school that September 
a happy fellow. Before he realized it he was on the 
train on his way back to Dulac; and once on it he 
could hardly wait for it to get there. The pleasurable 
anticipation of meeting his college friends again was 
surprising to him. He hadn’t known that he cared so 
much about them. They had all grumbled a bit the 
previous year about this, that and the other thing, 
and he didn’t realize, until he had been away just how 
much the old school meant to him. Now he would 
begin his regular study of law and in this one prospect 
alone he was intensely interested. 

And there was football! Since his conversation with 
Hunk regarding the possible State game in another 
year he found that his interest was doubled, trebled! 
How he would like to play against a team coached by 
Smith! If he ever got into a game like that he knew 
he would surprise Smith; in fact he would even sur- 
prise himself. 

A game with State—and he on the Dulac team! 
The possibility seemed almost too good to be true. 


CHAPTER VI 
LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 


SURE am glad the coach has promoted you to the 

second team,” said Rip to Elmer, as they sat to- 
gether in their room about a week after the opening of 
school. It was the evening of the day on which this 
new stride in Elmer’s advance took place. 

“Yes, and it makes me feel pretty good,” replied 
Elmer. “I only hope now that Shorty Dunne doesn’t 
get hurt. Id like to have a season to study under him 
before undertaking any such responsibilities as the 
running of the team in a big game.” 

“Well,” Rip went on, “Shorty is a rugged boy, and 
can take a lot of punishment. But we fellows that 
were freshmen last year have a lot of confidence in 
you.’ 

“Thanks,” said Elmer, “that makes me feel real good, 
Rip. But the rest of the backfield are all seniors, and 
I don’t believe they’d feel any too sure about me if I 
were to get out there in some big game and start calling 
numbers.” 

The roommates resumed their studying at this point; 
but through Elmer’s mind ran various ideas as to what 
he could do to inspire confidence in himself among 


the older heads on the team. After he went to bed 
56 


LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 57 


that evening, he lay awake for hours, running over in 
his mind various ways and means to achieve his ends. 
As yet, he had no chance to realize his possibilities, or 
his limitations; he had as yet, himself, no tangible evi- 
dence as to what he really could do. He had hopes 
some day of being a Shorty Dunne; and yet of late 
certain fears had beset him that perhaps his old arch- 
‘enemy, Coach Smith, was right; that he was no good; 
that he never would be a football player. Which would 
he realize, his hopes or his fears? His last thoughts 
before he dropped off to sleep were hazily to the effect 
that he must, he must, he must make the team! 

The first two weeks on the field were confined almost 
entirely to fundamentals. To Elmer’s surprise, all the 
drudgery of blocking, tackling, and falling on the ball 
was gradually turned to play. The exhilaration of be- 
ing actually a contender for the team changed entirely 
his point of view, and the things which at one time 
had been nothing but drudgery, were now executed 
with snap and enthusiasm. The coach spent most of 
his time in showing him how to form a pocket in catch- 
ing punts; how to squat before lunging and running 
interference; and also how to relax when using the dive 
interference. They also rehearsed four simple running 
plays and two forward pass plays over and over again, 
until it seemed that even an imbecile could remember 
‘their minutest detail. They ran these plays against 
another team of eleven men, who were instructed to 
stand there like so many dummies. In this way every 
man learned his assignment on each of these plays thor- 
oughly, to such a point of perfection that what had 





58 FOUR WINNERS 


once been mere mental reactions were bese to de- 
velop into reflex actions. 

The squad was kept in a good humor by the clumsy 
and comical efforts of a boy by the name of Peaches, 
who was trying out for tackle. Peaches had the repu- 
tation of being so clumsy and of lacking coordination 
to such an extent that he was even said to be an un- 
welcome customer in self-service cafeterias. As the 
story went, he had broken so many dishes and upset 
so many trays in these places that this year he was 
eating in a boarding house where everything was 
served to him from the head of the table. 

The assistant coach seemed to take keen delight in 
picking on Peaches. In tackling the dummy, Peaches 
came up and did just about as well as he could with 
his big feet, big hands and contorted facial expressions. 

“Not very good form,” said one assistant coach. 

“No,” said the other assistant coach, “but the man 
he was to tackle was so overcome with laughter at the 
face that Peaches made that he collapsed. You keep 
making that face, Peaches, and you'll stop any ball 
carrier with a sense of humor.” 

On the opening scrimmage, Peaches, who was play- 
ing tackle on the second team, was surprised to find 
that he himself didn’t play against the other tackle. 
Elmer heard the assistant coach mutter under his 
breath, “We'll have to dissolve the shellac off this 
fellow’s brain or it will always be impervious to any: 
ideas”; and then out loud to Peaches he said, “The 
tackle on offense plays outside the defensive guard, and 
on defense plays off the offensive end’s outside shoulder, 


LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 59 


unless the offensive end comes out too wide. Even 
then, always play him with hand and eye.” A smile 
went around at that, for everyone could see from the 
facial expression of Peaches that he had no idea what 
playing a man with hand and eye meant. 

On another occasion they had a terrible time with 
Peaches, trying to get him to leave his feet in falling 
on a fumbled ball. 

“Why don’t I leave my feet when falling on a 
fumble?” asked the assistant coach, who had charge of 
the tackles. Judging from the bewildered look on 
Peaches’ face it was evident that he had no idea. “My 
reason,” continued the assistant coach, “is a wife and 
three children.” 

The next time the ball was thrown out in front of 
him, Peaches let himself go out into space like a huge 
catapult, and there was a great giggle as he lit on the 
fumble with arms and legs spread out in the most gro- 
tesque manner. As he didn’t get up at once, but lay 
there, Elmer ran to his assistance and found that one 
hand was bent under the body. It must have been 
severely sprained in the jolt, and it was several days 
before Peaches again eUslss on the field. 

_ “Tf I were as clumsy as he is,” said Rip to Elmer one 
night, “I swear I’d get a job waiting over at the ice 
cream parlor and spend an hour a day at coordinating 
exercises. 

_ “Maybe,” said Elmer, “but just the same, I think 
Peaches has got the kind of stuff in him that means de- 
termination. He’ll learn how to handle himself some 
day, and then look out! With that tremendous power 


} 





60 FOUR WINNERS 


he has, and his esa heart, he’ll surprise every” 
body—you wait and see.’ 

After two weeks of practice the coach announced his 
opening scrimmage, and all the players put on extra 
pads so as to guard against injuries. Coach Brown 
was a great believer in taking no unnecessary chances. 
in practice, and Elmer was so padded up with “rubber 
doughnuts” that he went out on the field feeling like 
an ad for a rubber tire. 

While the rest of the squad was warming up, Coach 
Brown gave the scrub quarterbacks a few minutes over 
in one corner of the field. | 

“Well, you men have had two weeks to practice 
cage plays loudly, cae and TSAR OHS In away 






aoe 

“First, when in doubt, punt; second, § 
chesty and egotistical as you can be in rt it 
team, and if any of the backs or linemen’ 
prompt you as to what plays to call, tell them’ wHe 
to get off. You run the team offense, absolutely, and. 
if you don’t—out you'll corme—so quickly it will sur- 
prise you. 

“Third, and most important of all, I want you to 
know len not to forward pass. I don’t want you to. 
forward pass in the early part of the game, when the. 
score is even, or in your own territory. I don’t want. 
you to forward pass when you get ahead. I don’t want 
you to pass when near the other team’s goal line, as 
this might go for a touchback. Don’t forward pass as» 


LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 61 


long as your running attack is working well. Don’t 
forward pass when the defensive team seems to be 
alert and looking for it. Don’t forward pass unless you 
have a man executing the pass who has all the quali- 
fications of an expert. In other words, take no unneces- 
sary chances. Your instinct will tell you when the 
psychological moment arrives for a forward pass. Now, 
this is all I am going to tell you today. 

“Your instructions are simple. Use them as you go 
along and make sure that you stay relaxed and retain 
your mental poise. Pay no attention to the hubbub 
around you. Be sure that you are clear in your mind 
as to pone wine you intend to do. Then do it, and do 





The most ate LG I ever saw in my life,” ae 





coach exclaimed. “El@¥en Alphonses and Gastons! 
This certainly looks like“a great year for Dulac.” 

This sarcasm had an instant effect. It spurred the 
second team on in such a way that from then on they 
played the first team nip and tuck. The halfbacks on 
Elmer’s team were Credon, who Elmer felt was a good 
back because of his interference; and Durley, who he 
felt just as certain was an overrated dub. 

Credon tried to advance the ball and found himself 
unable to, because Durley was just as weak in taking 


62 FOUR WINNERS 


out an end as he had been as a freshman. Durley 
made several good gains because Credon had even im- 
proved as an interferer. He knocked the end flat on his 
back on each and every occasion, so that all Durley had 
to do was to follow his interference going at the sec- 
ondary defense. He always gained some yardage and 
as he lined up he seemed to be pretty, well satisfied with 
himself. 

The second team reached the five yard line and 
here they were stopped twice for no gain. Peaches, 
who was playing at right tackle, came back and sug- 
gested to Elmer, “Shoot thirty-three over me, I know 
it will go.” They lined up, and Elmer called the play 
in which Durley carried the ball off tackle. 

“Signals,” yelled Peaches. He came back and de- 
manded of Elmer, “Didn’t I tell you to send thirty- 
three over me?” 

“You go on back there at right tackle,’ Elmer or- 
dered, “and take care of that job and you'll be darn 
busy keeping those number twelve feet of yours out 
of everybody else’s way. I'll run this team at quarter- 
back.” 

He repeated the number for the off-tackle play, and 
running behind the fullback, Credon and Elmer, Dur- 
ley dashed for the five yards and a touchdown. Cre- 
don knocked the end flat on his back, the fullback had 
jammed the tackle in and Elmer had cut down the 
secondary. Despite this, as they went back to kick 
off, Durley said to Elmer, “That’s the boy, Elmer, keep 
calling my number all the time.” 

“Tt looks like we'll have to,” sarcastically retorted 


LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 63 


Elmer, “so long as you don’t touch the end whenever 
Credon’s number is called. Who do you think you are, 
some prima donna?” 
The whistle blew shortly afterward for the end of 
the scrimmage, and the only thing which seemed to be 
on Coach Brown’s mind just then was the question of 
injuries. Finding that no one had been hurt, he ex- 
pressed himself as being fairly well satisfied, but an- 
nounced that he would take up the matter of criticisms 
of the scrimmage the following Monday. 
After they had taken their shower and were dressed 
Elmer noticed Durley and a group of his friends in a 
hushed conversation over in the corner. As he went 
by them on his way out he paid no attention to them, 
but he couldn’t help hearing Durley’s remark, “and he’s 
green with jealousy of the way I carried the ball.” 
It was evident to Elmer that unless something was 
done a clique feeling was liable to develop. His first 
impulse was to go to Coach Brown and explain the 
whole thing to him; but after deliberation he decided 
that this was not the thing to do. He would wait until 
Monday and hear what Coach Brown had to say. In 
the meantime he kept his counsel. 
_ The entire squad met on Monday tense with eager- 
ness for the scrimmage criticisms, for Coach Brown had 

a reputation for speaking eke and every man was 
keyed to expectancy for the talk. The coach opened 

his remarks with a word concerning team work, and the 
spirit of all for one, and one for all. He went on dis- 
cussing the need for more speed on offense, the need 


| for more aggressiveness on the line on defense. He 
| 


64 | FOUR WINNERS 


took up each man on the first team individually, and 
commended him for his good points and then brought 
out his weaknesses. Despite the fact that he men- 
tioned names it was evident that his remarks were 
totally impersonal. He then wound up with the ques- 
tion of the value of men to a team. 
“We have a tradition here at Dulac,” he said, “that 
we give credit entirely on offense to those men who run 
interference, to those men who perform the menial un- 
selfish task of knocking down and out of the way the 
would-be tacklers of the defense. Likewise, on defense, 
we give entire credit to the men who can tackle and the 
men who can play defense against the forward pass. 
“But coming back to offense we, among ourselves, 
on the team, and the coaching staff, do not give credit 
to the man who carries the ball. The man who can do 
nothing, except when he is carrying the ball, the man 
who, because of his inactivity, causes us to have only 
ten men on offense when he is not carrying the ball, 
such a man is worth practically nothing to this team. 
“As to the scrimmage Saturday, I want to assure 
those scrubs like Credon, Higgins, and Jones at full- 
back, that their interference was the sort of thing a 
coach likes to see. I want to warn the first string backs 
that they had better be up on their mettle and on their 
toes, or any one of these three men here might take 
their places over night. And I also want to very ur- 
gently request that if there is anyone here who doesn’t 
think it is necessary to run interference, he had better 
hand in his suit, and the sooner the better.” 
It was frank talk, all right, and Elmer took it all in 








LEARNING AT EVERY TURN 65 


with profit; and not without a certain amount of 
speculation as to what effect the coach’s last words 
might have on a fellow like Durley. When he came 
out on the field that afternoon he was surprised to see 
Durley over in the corner with a Varsity end, and he 
was further surprised to see him practising interfering. 

“Well I guess he got the shock of his life this noon,” 
said Rip to Elmer as they were loosening up. 

“Yes, but from what I see over there in the corner,” 


‘Elmer answered, “he may still be worth something to 
the team.” 


The following Tuesday and Wednesday Elmer scrim- 
maged again and found that he had made several mis- 
takes. Once he discovered himself on fourth down so 


close to the side lines that the kicker kicked out of 
bounds before the ball had gone ten yards. On another 
occasion he tried to rush the ball on his own ten yard 


line, and the man carrying the ball fumbled and a Var- 
sity man recovered it. As the Varsity had but ten 


yards to go for a touchdown, they scored quickly. 


To Elmer’s surprise Coach Brown said nothing to 
him about this out on the field; so, after some little 


silent debating with himself, on the way back to the 


gymnasium, after practice, he walked up to the coach 
and spoke to him, telling him about the mistakes he 


had made. Coach Brown paced along with him slowly 


until there were no other players within hearing. Then 
he spoke. 
“Don’t ever make those mistakes again. But I’d 


rather have you make mistakes now and profit by 
them, than just do the right thing accidentally in 


66 FOUR WINNERS 


practice and make the mistakes in a big game. An- 
other thing, Higgins, I don’t want you to have your- 
self carrying the ball as much as you have been. I want 
you to have a clear head for calling the signals, and for 
kicking the ball high and far when called upon to 
punt.” 

Elmer was glad he had spoken. He was learning at 
every turn. 


CHAPTER VII 
“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN.” 


HE opening game that year was against a small 

normal school. The Varsity began easy, running 

up four touchdowns in the first half, without any par- 

ticular effort. Then Elmer’s turn came. Between the 
halves Coach Brown gave him his instructions. 

“T’m going to send you and your team in this second 
half, Higgins, and I want you to use just three plays, 
and one of these is a forward pass by yourself to 
Credon or Durley out to the side. Do you get me? 
I know we haven’t got this play in our repertoire, but 
the stand is full of scouts and I want them to see this 
kind of forward pass, though you can rest assured that 
we will never try anything so foolish in a big game. 
The normal team has one good tackle, the big left 
tackle, and I want you to hit that spot all afternoon 
so that we can get some practice. We have all the 
points we want now, and all we are out for in the 
second half is a workout against enough opposition to 
enable us to correct our weak points.” 

Elmer’s team went into the game determined to 
make good on this chance. But his team scored just 
once in the second half; and yet the coach seemed 


very far from dissatisfied. 
67 


68 | FOUR WINNERS 


“You let yourself get into the bad lands once there, 
Higgins,” he said, when it was all over. “But it’s all 
right; just keep in mind that you must always 
maneuver so as to never get too close to the sidelines 
when you are about to score. Also, don’t forget to 
use your best play on your first down. as this will put 
you away ahead for your remaining three downs.” 

It was on the following Tuesday that Shorty Dunne 
was hurt. That made a sensation for the campus, and 
the talk increased when Coach Brown announced 
that he was going to keep Dunne out of the next 
practice game, which was against a small college from 
a neighboring state. “Dunne out?—who then?’ Of 
course everybody understood that he wanted to save 
Shorty for the big game the Saturday following 
against South Square; but who would he choose to 
replace him in the meantime? The school was agog 
with gossip and speculation. 

That same night Coach Brown appeared at Elmer’s 
door. 

“May I have a half hour of your time?” 

As Elmer gave him a chair, he couldn’t help but 
admire this man for his strong and direct, yet modest. 
ways. 

“T know how busy you are,” Brown went on, “keep- 
ing up in your classes, and I don’t want to take up 
too much of your time. But there are a few things 
we must keep in mind regarding this team Saturday. 
They have a fine defense, but not much of an offense, 
and I think it will be up to you to play a kicking 
game and have the whole team alert for the breaks. 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” 69 


If you find a weak spot, nurse it along, use it just 
once in a while, when you have to, and try to save it 
for the time when it will do you most good.” 

The coach then went on to explain the comparative 
strength of the half dozen plays they were using and 
their use in logical sequence; how the use of one play 
made another play strong, and he also discussed with 
Elmer for awhile the relative ability of the various 
Dulac backs on these particular plays. 

From that moment, of course, Elmer knew that his 
work was cut out for him. But even so, the game the 
following Saturday proved more exciting than he or 
any of his team mates had expected. It was scheduled 
originally as merely an easy practice game, to give the 
coach an opportunity to pick his thirty-three men for 
the big trip away from home against South Square 
the following week-end. To his intense surprise, 
Elmer didn’t feel at all nervous as he lined up on the 
kickoff. 

Dulac received and carried the ball back on the 
return almost to midfield. Two plays failed to gain 
an inch of ground and Elmer dropped back and 
kicked out of bounds on the ten yard line, on the 
third down. The first quarter was practically a con- 
stant repetition of this—Dulac unable to gain, and 
Higgins punting the ball back to the opponents who 
were also unable to gain. The result was a sort of 
punting duel, neither with any particular advantage. 

In the middle of the second quarter, however, the 
Alba quarterback fumbled a punt and as quick as a 
flash it was recovered by one of the Dulac ends on the 


70 7 FOUR WINNERS 


twelve yard line. Elmer now picked on the weak spot, 
which he had noticed in the earlier part of the game, 
and gained six yards. The next play failed to gain; 
and on the third down Elmer threw a forward pass, 
which went over the goal line, incomplete, for a touch- 
back. 2 

The ball was brought out to the thirty yard line, 
but Alba was unable to gain in three downs and on the 
fourth down an attempted kick was partly blocked 
and recovered by Dulac on the fifteen yard line. 
Again Elmer, on first down, hit the weak spot for 
seven yards, and two more plunges made it first down 
on Alba’s four yard line. On the first down he again 
used the weak spot at guard, but this time the play 
gained only one yard, making it second down and 
three yards to go for a touchdown. Elmer was clearly 
worried, and called numbers for two or three plays, 
changing his mind in each case, and finally he called 
for a split buck which gained two yards, placing the 
ball on the one yard line. He got up and stalled 
around for about a minute. He couldn’t quite 
make up his mind just what play to call, when “bang” 
—the gun went off announcing the end of the half. 

On his way into the field house, Elmer, feeling 
very much like kicking himself all over the lot, was 
passed up by Durley, who said nothing at first, but 
gave him a sneery look. That burnt up Elmer, and 
fire was added as he overheard Durley remark to one 
of the other teammates, “Wait until Coach Brown 
opens up on this sap quarterback between the halves 
—then you'll hear something good.” 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” rg 


It was hard to be silent then; but Elmer said noth- 
ing, for the fact is he was all set for this sort of thing, 
realizing that he had it coming to him because of 
his mistakes in forward passing on the third down, and 
in running the team so slowly, with so short a time left 
to play, that he had robbed them of a touchdown. 

He wondered what Coach Brown would say. But 
to his surprise Brown merely took him over to one 
side and asked him, “Do you realize now the little 
mistakes you made this half?” 

“Yes,” replied Elmer, “I’m afraid I am an awful 
dumbbell.” 

“No,” said the coach, “‘you are getting along nicely, 
but of course, when near the opponents’ goal, as you 
were the first time, I wouldn’t forward pass at all. 
And you must always have two or three moves pre- 
pared in advance. Now, you haven’t used seventy- 
three or sixty-eight at all, and they are primarily 
scoring plays to be used inside the ten yard line. So 
play exactly the same kind of a game you have been 
playing, and bear in mind not to use sixty-eight or 
seventy-three if your running plays are going well, 
but as soon as you are stopped call on them. If you 
happen to get worried don’t show it to your team- 
mates; always be glad and confident in appearance 
and near the end of the half keep in touch with the 
timekeeper, and the time left to play. In such a case 
as occurred this afternoon always run your team 
faster.” 

As Elmer went out for the second half, he felt he 
never could forget Coach Brown for the kindness of 


72 , FOUR WINNERS 


that criticism. “He has a heart, that man!” he ex- 
claimed to himself; and the next moment he was onto 
the field, keyed up with determination to merit the 
coach’s confidence. 

The second half proved to be an entirely different 
game, and Dulac scored two touchdowns in short 
order. Shortly afterward Credon appeared on the 
field and replaced the left halfback. Credon reeled 
off some good gains and shortly after the start of the 
fourth quarter went over for a touchdown. Imme- 
diately after the goal was kicked, making the score 
twenty-one to nothing, Durley appeared, as substi- 
tute for the right halfback. What happened subse- 
quently was a repetition of what had always hap- 
pened whenever Credon and Durley were on the same 
team. Credon couldn’t gain and Elmer became so 
enraged at the contemptible bearing of Durley that, 
when he got close to the sidelines, he called out to the 
coaches on the bench, “Send me out a right halfback 
who can interfere.” However, there was no change 
made and they bungled along as best they could until 
the end of the game, the final score being twenty-one 
to nothing. 

After the game, as Elmer emerged from the dress- — 
ing rooms, he found Durley and several of his friends 
waiting for him. 

“What a fine sneak you’re turning out to be,” said 
Durley. “Trying to make your friends look good to 
the coach, and make a monkey out of me, aren’t you?” 

With those words Durley lurched at Elmer aggres- 
sively and insultingly. 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” 73 


But Elmer was determined to avoid a fight at all 
costs. “I don’t believe it’s fair,’ he replied, “for 
Credon to be taking your end out for you every time 
your number is called, and then when his number is 
called to find you absolutely making no pretense of 
taking care of the end.” 

“That’s none of your business,” said Durley. “It 
seems to me Coach Brown can take care of his own job 
and I have a mind to give you a good licking.” 

Elmer’s first impulse was to tie into the fellow; but 
he remembered Coach Brown’s admonition about al- 
ways bearing in mind the best interests of the team, 
so, still determined to avoid a fight, he merely walked 
away. 

“I’m sorry,’ is all he said. “I assure you that it 
shan’t happen again.” 

“Youre yellow,” Durley hurled at him; but Elmer 
made no reply, and controlling himself with difficulty 
went to his room. 

The first part of the following week was filled with 
feverish activity. The South Square plays were re- 
hearsed by the Freshmen, who used them with all the 
power they could mobilize against the Varsity teams, 
in scrimmage on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednesday. 
Coach Brown gave out no new plays except one trick 
play to be used in the latter half of the game in case 
they were behind,—just a play to be used as a last 
resort. Offensively the team had a lot of exercise, 
working dummy scrimmage against another Fresh- 
man team who were passive on defense, but who used 


74 FOUR WINNERS 


the same offensive which it was expected South 
Square would adopt. 

After practice Wednesday afternoon the list of the 
thirty-three men to make the South Square trip was 
posted. Elmer’s name was on it; and so was Rip’s. 
Rip was delighted to see his name on it, because, for 
some foolish reason or other, he seemed to have the 
idea that he might be left home. They congratulated 
each other and were as pleased as two young boys 
could possibly be. That night the students held a 
big rally in the gymnasium—the idea of the coach 
being to properly impress on the team that the stu- 
dent body was solidly behind them in their coming 
game with South Square. The entire squad of thirty- 
three picked men sat on the platform and listened to 
the admonitions of the various speakers who rose to 
oratorical heights in their attempt to create excite- 
ment and the proper emotional reactions. Rip was 
highly excited, but Elmer took everything very soberly. 

“Aren’t you just excited to death?” asked Rip in a 
pause between speeches. “Gee, I can feel the goose 
flesh creeping up all over me!”’ 

“Goose flesh nothing,” Elmer answered. “Oh, it’s 
all right as long as you feel that it’s helping you. As 
for me, all I can think of is that South Square has a 
veteran team. That’s enough to make me realize that 
if I’m lucky enough to get into the game Saturday, 
I'll have to do some pretty tall thinking.” 

The last speech over and the last strains of Dulac’s 
“Victory March” having died away, Elmer and Rip 
were strolling on their way back to the room, when 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” 75 


suddenly, as they were turning up the walk which led 
to their dorm., they were surprised to find themselves 
confronted by a group of half a dozen fellows. What 
was this? It all became plain in an instant; for there 
was Durley stepping out belligerently and thrusting 
his face into Elmer’s. 

“You're the dirty sneaking hound who’s responsible 
for my being kept off the list! Your friend Credon is 
on the list and my name is left off, just through your 
backbiting, and I’m going to whip you within an inch 
of your life.” 

“That’s all well and good,” said Rip quietly, step- 
ping up: “My man can take care of himself. But I 
suggest that we adjourn to the gymnasium, where you 
fellows can put this thing on fairly and without inter- 
ference.” 

“That suits me,” said Durley, and the entire group 
turned and made their way back to the Gym. 

Elmer said not a word. He was furious, but he was 
cool and determined. 

Up in the boxing room both men stripped except for 
Gym suits. Rip appointed himself time-keeper and 
arranged that the combatants were to box three min- 
ute rounds with a one minute rest until one or the 
other gave up. Although one of Durley’s friends was 
appointed referee, Durley didn’t seem particularly 
pleased with these arrangements. 

“Why, the little yellow stiff will quit in the first 
round, and I won’t get a chance to get even.” 

“Before you get through, Durley,’ Rip retorted, 


76 FOUR WINNERS 


“the only thing that will hold you here will be the 
four walls. You'll want to jump out of the building.” 

The difference in physique was only too apparent as 
both men advanced to the center of the boxing room; 
Durley was a fairly tall, long armed chap, weighing 
about one hundred and sixty pounds, while Elmer was 
of a frailer type, and weighed less than one hundred 
and forty. It was just as evident that if Durley knew 
anything at all about boxing he ought to make short 


/ work of the little quarterback. 


The first round was all Durley’s—a wide wild right 
swing landed three times on the chest, the stomach, 
and the side of Elmer’s head; and though there was 
no particular power to these blows, it was evident that 
if this continued it would be a very short time before 
Durley would wear Elmer down and out. 

In the intermission, however, Rip whispered to 
Elmer, ‘Every time you see that right coming in, just 
step inside of it, and counter with your right—elbow 
in close.” 

And the advice proved perfect. Adopting these 
tactics in the second round, Elmer was surprised to 
find that Durley was powerless to hurt him, for Dur- 
ley’s hand was all right—his left was no good at all. 
The third, fourth, and fifth rounds went on; both 
boys were tiring fast; they were unable to hit each 
other. In the sixth round, Durley began to weaken 
disastrously, and Elmer, whose trim condition was to 
his advantage, began to assume the upper hand. 
Towards the end of the round, Durley was so tired he 
could hardly raise his arms. 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” Cb 


“What do you say we call this enough?” said Dur- 
ley, at the end of the round. 

“No,” said Rip, “my man is going to beat you to a 
pulp.” 

“No, I’m not,” broke in Elmer. “If he’s satisfied, 
I certainly am.” 

So the fight ended. 

It was obvious, however, from the look in Durley’s 
eye as he and Elmer undressed and took their shower, 
that he was far from satisfied. 

Mortified by their failure, Durley and his friends 
left. | 

“Y’m afraid I made a mistake,” Elmer said to Rip 
when they were alone. 

“Mistake—how?” 

“Why, in any way to have taken it on myself to say 
whether or not Durley did his part. But I’ve seen so 
much injustice in that direction that I just couldn’t 
help it.” 

— “JT don’t blame you one bit,” said Rip. “TI never 
could stomach Durley or his friends, anyway, and I’d 
just as soon have them for enemies as not.” 

— “Yes; but harmony, Rip—there’s got to be harmony 
‘on the team,” Elmer protested. 

_ “As far as the harmony on the team is concerned,” 
‘Rip came back, “we’re all with you. Durley and his 
friends aren’t on the squad and no matter what you 
do, he and his kind will spend the rest of the fall 
knocking you, and Coach Brown, and the rest of the 
team. You just wait and see. And don’t forget 





| 


{ 
78 FOUR WINNERS . 


what Professor Noon said, ‘A man is known by the 
enemies he has.’ So let’s go home and forget it!” 
The next day at noon the team left for South. 
Square. There was no one at the station to see them 
off, as classes were in session. The players had an 
entire Pullman car to themselves. Once settled in 
the train, Coach Brown called the men together in 
groups, according to their position, and quizzed them 
on their various assignments, both offensive and de- 
fensive. He called the quarterbacks over to him last. 
Then, after the routine quizzing, came a real surprise. 
“Higgins,” said the coach, “I intend to start you 
with the second team, and I hope you can go in there 
and hold off South Square for a quarter. Your in- 
structions are simple. Kick continually on third 
down. On first and second down I want you to try 
thirty-three and twenty-one. I'll have Shorty Dunne 
with me on the sidelines, and I want to see South 
Square’s defense and how they meet these two plays. 
This will give us the key to the entire defensive situa- 
tion, and will let you, Shorty, go out there having 
clearly in your mind exactly what to do.” | 
The next morning found them riding along the pic- 
turesque Hudson, where the beautiful scenery of Cats-_ 
kills and Palisades was a revelation to all the boys | 
who had never been East. Next came the excitement 
of getting the New York papers which all contained 
stories on the game, reporting that the South Square 
team had just had their last scrimmage, were in good 
condition, and were expected to win easily. As Elmer 
glanced around at the various boys who had read 


“TOMORROW WE MUST WIN” ih, 


these articles, it appeared evident to him that who- 
ever the publicity man was for South Square, he had 
used the wrong psychological tactics; for now the 
Dulac boys seemed more determined than ever that 
South Square would not win—not by a long shot! 

The welcome by the South Square authorities was 
very cordial, and every courtesy and convenience was 
shown the boys in making them comfortable in their 
quarters for the night. Dulac was given the field for 
a workout between three and four in the afternoon, 
and there was no would-be spectator within a mile of 
the field. That evening, the entire South Square 
student body marched in a torchlight parade to the 
hotel where Dulac was quartered, and after giving 
their own yell and a yell for Dulac they called for 
speeches by Coach Brown, the captain, and Shorty 
Dunne. It was a great ovation, and in a way, 
strangely enough, it rather unsteadied the chaps from 
Dulac. 

Coach Brown, however, called a meeting just before 
they went to bed, getting them all together in a large 
room. 

“Some of you fellows may feel a little bit unstrung 
over this reception here tonight,” he said, “but I want 
you to bear in mind that the game tomorrow means 
everything to us, and good fellows as they are we’ve 
got to beat them. This cheering was all right, but 
don’t let it bother you. It’s just a lot of noise. We 
won’t have any rooters here tomorrow, so during the 
game remember it’s just a lot of noise and you're not 
to pay any attention to it. Twenty-five hundred stu- 


80 | FOUR WINNERS 


dents are back home banking on you to represent the 
school. You have a big responsibility, and I don’t 
want you to forget it for one second. Come on now— 
a good night’s rest. Tomorrow we must win!” 


CHAPTER VIII 
THE FIRST BIG GAME 


HE day of the game the sun came out bright and 
warm. There was a tang in the air that was 
enough to make anyone up at the hour of seven 
o'clock snap to it. After breakfast, Elmer and Rip 
took a short stroll around the grounds and they were 
so impressed by the day, the surroundings, and the 
occasion that they seemed to walk on air. After their 
stroll they went back to the hotel, and packed their 
luggage, and at nine-thirty they pe out in the big 
bus for New York City. 

The only incident of note on the trip was when they 
were arrested in one of the suburbs of New York City 
for speeding. The police officer, however, relented 
when he found it was the Dulac football team and 
allowed them to proceed with the warning that they 
had better stay within the speed limits, as the next 
“cop” might not be so lenient. 

They arrived at their downtown hotel at eleven 
o'clock, and found the lobby a bedlam. Every Dulac 
alumnus within a radius of hundreds of miles was 
there, and as there were a lot of them who had neg- 
lected to get tickets for the game until this last min- 


ute, the place was loud with exclamations and talk 
81 


82 FOUR WINNERS 


- about the gross inefficiency back at old Dulac. It was 
the oldtime kicking spirit in full play again, the spirit — 
that makes a man roast his Alma Mater himself,— — 
and want to murder any outsider who does the same. — 


But things soon quieted down, for the student man- 


p 


ager of ticket sales had foreseen and made allowance > 
for just such things as this, taking care of the alumni | 


out of a separate allotment which he had stowed 
away for this sort of an emergency. 


The team went down and ate their consommé and 


toast quickly, and were then all ordered up to their 


rooms with instructions to le down until twelve- 


thirty. At twelve-thirty they were to be prepared to — 
meet in the lobby and get into the busses for the Polo — 


Grounds. 


For the first time in his life Elmer felt his knees | 


knocking. A shiver ran through him every once in a 


while as he lay up in the bed, the portentous first big — 
game occupying all his thoughts. As he thought of — 


the responsibility that would be his at the start of the | 


game, a cold sweat came out on his forehead; he shook 
all over. It seemed like ages before the phone bell 


finally rang, and the student manager said, “T'welve-— 


thirty! Everybody down in the lobby.” 


The boys arrived at the Polo Grounds one half 


hour later, and found five hundred gate crashers, in- 
cluding some small boys there, waiting for their ar- 
rival, and hoping to sneak in with the team. It was 
an exciting scene, but the Polo Grounds manager was 


adamant, and nobody got in except a few small boys. 


who carried the personal belongings of some of the 


THE FIRST BIG GAME 83 


players into the lockers. The trunks were hastily un- 
packed and the players dressed themselves imme- 
diately. 

“There are to be no extra pads on today,” the coach 
announced; “only regulation thigh guards taped on to 
the thigh, shoulder pads and head gears, nothing else.” 

At one-thirty sharp the coach sent all his men out 
on the field to limber up, with instructions to the 
kickers to limber up their legs and the quarterback to 
catch the punts and throw them back. The game 
was scheduled for two o’clock sharp, and at one-thirty 
there were very few people in the great amphithe- 
atre. After ten minutes’ work loosening up, the squad 
all went back to the dressing room, and sat down 
with their legs stretched out. The coach waited a 
minute or two; then he announced the opening lineup. 

“T want you backfield men to go in there and ham- 
mer and tong just as hard as you can for one quarter, 
and then the regular backfield will go in. Try twenty- 
one and thirty-three as often as you can, but always 
kick on the third down. Regarding the center, I want 
him to make sure of his passes on offense, and on de- 
fense I want him to keep moving around, keeping in 
mind the tactical situation, so that the offensive quar- 
terback can with no degree of certainty know where 
to find you. 

“T want the guards and tackles to charge savagely, 
offensively and defensively. On offense get under 
them and lift them; on defense expect every play to 
come right through your position. I want the ends on 
offense to get contact with the tackles and stay with 


84 | FOUR WINNERS 


them. On defense stay on the outside, and turn 
everything in. 

“Defensive fullback, keep moving; and against run- 
ning plays hit them so hard that the man carrying the 
ball won’t want to come back again. Learn to run- 
and look at the same time, and don’t let them fool you. 
Defensive halfbacks are responsible for passes, and 
their key is to watch the offensive end. You quarter- 
backs have your instructions—do your own analyzing 
and meet any situation that might arise clearly and 
decisively. | 

“Don’t forget,” the coach went on, passing from 
specific instructions to general advice, “don’t forget 
that this afternoon, when you are out there fighting, 
nothing else counts but grit. This is a fighting game 
and victory always comes to the fighting team. In all 
its glorious history Dulac has never had a team that 
has faltered. I think I know you men well, and I feel 
confident that you are all going to fight as no other 
Dulac team has ever fought. Two thousand students 
back at home are waiting for the returns of this game, 
and while they hope for victory they all have a feel- 
ing somehow that we are about to be beaten. 

“Let’s go out there this afternoon and surprise them. 
Let’s show them that this Dulac team here can hold 
its head up with any other and will have absolutely 
nothing to be ashamed of. Let’s go out there and 
play for the breaks. Let the officials do the officiating 
while we do the playing. But above all we must fight, 
fight, fight! And if we should happen to get behind, 


THE FIRST BIG GAME 85 


no one must be discouraged. At every turn we must 
come back with fight, fight, and ever more fight!” 

“Let’s go!” said the captain, and they were off. 

They ran out on the field with a snap and ginger that 
was thrilling to see. There was elasticity in every 
stride, tenseness in every jaw, a glint in every eye. 
A great roar of fifty-five thousand throats greeted 
them as they trotted out onto the field. 

For one little instant, Elmer felt his heart stop still. 
His whole being was tense with elation. It seemed 
but a few seconds before the captain came back with 
the word, ‘“We’ve won the toss, and kick off to South 
Square.” 

Shaking like a leaf, Elmer placed the ball straight 
up and down and dropped five yards back prepara- 
tory to making his running kick on the kickoff. The 
noise was confusing; it dinned in his ears; he vibrated 
in every nerve as he thought of the responsibility of 
kicking off that ball. He heard the referee’s “Are you 
ready?” and then the loud whistle. 

Running up decisively, keeping his eye, his mind, 
his whole sensible body on that ball, Elmer met it 
squarely and surely, and it flew well over the goal line, 
for a touchback. 

As he lined up on defense, an instant after the 
kickoff, he was surprised to find all his nervousness 
gone. With the kick, the tenseness had disappeared 
with a snap. Now he felt cool and collected. The 
vast throng of people was just a blur; he paid no at- 
tention to it. 

South Square was unable to gain any ground on two 


86 FOUR WINNERS 


plays and on the third down the South Square full- 
back punted sixty yards down the field, and Elmer, 
focusing his eye on the ball right into his arms, tucked 
it away and started forward. Two steps, and he felt 
himself hit just above the knees; the next instant he 
was flat on the ground. An instant later they were 
lined up in regular formation, and Elmer barked out 
the numbers “42, 71, 64, 15, hip.” The team shifted — 
and on the next hip, Credon, the left halfback, went — 
inside of tackle on the twenty-one play. A yard was © 
the best he could get. The plunge play by the full- — 
back, number thirty-three, was the next move; it also — 
yielded only a scant yard. Now the South Square © 
line had fire in its eye and it was evident that the 
yards gained by Dulac this day through that line © 
would be few and far between. 

On his own thirty-five yard line Elmer dropped — 
back into the kick formation, and sent a high spiral 
sailing fifty yards up the field. It was a high punt and 
the Dulac ends nailed the South Square quarterback © 
right in his tracks. However, South Square was on 
its own thirty yard line, having gained ten yards in ~ 
the exchange of kicks. Again the eastern boys started 
their attack; again they found the Dulac team fight- 
ing mad. After two attempts, they once more punted 
on the third down. This time, however, the kick was 
short and high, and as he came up fast, Elmer, seeing 
that the South Square ends were right on top of him, 
signaled for a fair catch. He held on to the ball on 
his own forty-five yard line. 

As he lined up this time, Elmer saw the South 


THE FIRST BIG GAME 87 


Square halfbacks creeping up closer and closer. Evi- 
dently they were totally unprepared for a forward 
pass. Strict zone play absolutely prohibited passing 
on the first down; hence their defensive maneuver. 
Yet, thought Elmer, this might be a good time to 
throw a forward pass. However, he had his instruc- 
tions, and again ran ahead with plays twenty-one and 
thirty-three. Failing to gain, he dropped back and 
kicked a high spiral slightly to one side; the ball rolled 
over the goal line for a touchback. 

Again the ball was brought out to the twenty yard 
line, and Elmer noticed instantly that he had made up 
the ten yards which he had lost on the previous ex- 
change of kicks. To his surprise, South Square 
punted this time on first down; standing on his own 
ten yard line the South Square punter lifted a clean 
kick of seventy yards. Elmer, standing on Dulac’s 
twenty yard line, caught it. The South Square right 
end took a long dive at him, but missed him, as Elmer 
side-stepped and starting up the side lines was not 
stopped until he reached midfield. 

By this time, Elmer was a mass of living brain and 
nerve, every inch of him coordinated, every fibre of 
him set for the one and only end of it all, a touch- 
down. Oh, for a touchdown! 

Lining up once more, he noticed the South Square 
halfbacks on defense again drawn up very close. But 
he was ready for anything. Nothing could stop him 
now. And then came the inevitable—Shorty Dunne 
and the three regulars trotting out to replace the 
shock backfield. With a pang in his heart, although 


88 FOUR WINNERS 


with marked relaxation from the responsibility of the 
strain, Elmer went to the side lines. But that pang 
was short lived. Another minute, and Elmer was once 
more electrified with the joy of the game, for, before 
he had pulled on his sweat shirt he heard Shorty 
Dunne, with first down ten, in midfield, call for a for- 
ward pass. An instant later the Dulac left end caught 
a long forward pass well behind the South Square half- 
backs, who were totally unprepared for it, and with 
a few more strides the Dulac end crossed the goal line 
for the first touchdown. | 

Coach Brown came over and sat down by Elmer. 

“We had seen all we wanted,” he explained, “and 
besides I was afraid the South Square coach would 
chase those halfbacks back there a little later, so I sent 
Shorty in there to take advantage of the weakness 
right away.” 

Elmer smiled, his whole heart in his eyes as he 
looked into the coach’s face. “Touchdown,” is all he 
could say. He was a happy boy. “Touchdown”’— 
and he had helped make it. 

The regular Dulac backfield later also found the 
South Square line defense impenetrable, and the rest 
of the half became a punting duel with no advantage 
on either side. Encouraged with hope at their suc- 
cess so far the Dulac boys went back into the dressing 
room, between halves, filled with enthusiasm. Coach 
Brown had them lie down at full length for seven or 
eight minutes and there wasn’t a word spoken. After 
about eight minutes the coach quietly began telling 
them that they had to go back in and fight harder dur- 


THE FIRST BIG GAME 89 


ing the second half, as the South Square team was 
sure to come back with a punch. 

“Let’s take no chances this second half; we are 
seven points to the good, so let’s play it safe. Let 
South Square take all the chances and we will be out 
there playing for the breaks. Shorty, when you have 
the ball, kill time as much as you can, and you won't 
have to kick until the fourth down, as Jonesey kicks so 
fast they will never block one of them in the world. 
So let’s go out there now and stop them dead, kill 
time, kick, and Oey for the breaks. And let us play 
it Pe plutely safe.” 

They went back out to the field. 

South Square came back with a punch, making 
three first downs in a row, but in midfield they were 
stopped dead. Then began a kicking duel which 
lasted until the fourth quarter. Getting the ball in 
the last quarter, in their own territory, South. Square 
began throwing passes promiscuously, in all direc- 
tions; but the alert Dulac players continued knock- 
ing them down. Finally, in desperation, the South 
Square quarterback threw a forward pass straight 
out toward the side lines, a very dangerous thing to 
do, and Shorty Dunne, coming up fast picked it 
cleanly out of the air and ran sixty yards for a touch- 
down. That was a sight that made Elmer, sitting on 
the side lines, swell with delight. - 

Dulac kicked goal again, making the score fourteen 
to nothing. South Square came back valiantly and 
through superhuman effort developed sufficient power 
to march to the twenty yard line. Here, time being 


90 | FOUR WINNERS 


almost up, South Square tried a place kick, but failed; 
and at that moment the gun went off, ending the 
game. 

Elmer was never so enthused in his life and he ran 
out on the field and hugged Rip in his joy. The 
Dulac alumni surrounded the team and congratulated 
them, and it was fifteen minutes before Elmer was 
able to make his way through the crowd to the dress- 
ing room. There were no injuries, and everyone was 
happy and delirious with joy. The team ate at the _ 
hotel that night, as guests of the local alumni, and 
that evening went to a theatre party where they had 
another surprise, with Will Rogers, the inimitable 
comedian, giving the Dulac team a couple of send-offs | 
in his famous monologue. Elmer had heard some- 
where that the ordinary man had but three or four 
supreme moments in a lifetime, and he felt certain 
this Polo Grounds experience must surely be one of 
his. Tired but happy the boys boarded the train at 
midnight, and soon the steady churning of the car. 
wheels put him and his teammates to sleep, safe, 
sound, and victorious, homeward bound after the 
first big game. | 


CHAPTER IX 
IT’S ALL IN THE GAME 


ONDAY afternoon the team began active prac- 

tice for the Kingston game and the startled 
Varsity were surprised to find the Freshmen already 
well entrenched in their knowledge of the Kingston 
attack. They mobilized this attack savagely, and 
that evening after practice whatever tendency to- 
wards ego the Varsity had was rudely dispelled. The 
Freshmen, by their bellicose attack, had severely im- 
pressed on them the calibre and worth of the King- 
ston team. 

“It certainly looks to me as if we wouldn’t have 
much time for gloating over our last victory,” said 
Rip. 

“The way the Freshmen went through us tonight 
shows we’ve been a little stuck on ourselves; we'll 
have to get over it,” Elmer answered. “I suppose it 
will be our turn to scrimmage tomorrow. And say, did 
you notice Durley out there this afternoon, just as 
nice as pie?” 

“Oh, why spoil the evening by mentioning his 
name!” exclaimed the big curly headed tackle, as he 
proceeded to disrobe for bed. “Durley’s not the Dulac 


type of man. He doesn’t fit in here at all.” 
91 


92 FOUR WINNERS 


Elmer finished the letter which he was writing 
home, and then joined Rip in slumber. The next day. 
the morning mail brought both him and Rip a happ), 
surprise, an invitation to each of them from the 
president of the Fellowship Club. This club wai, 
purely an eating club, the members all taking thei 
meals together in a certain building, where they hac 
their own chef. It was not a fraternity, and while, 
the club was a little exclusive nothing existed which, 
tended toward snobbery. The several dining clubs of 
the university included in their personnels the lead- 
ers in the various activities, and these clubs in nc 
way impaired the atmosphere of democracy around 
old Dulac. | 

“Whoopee for honors!” Elmer shouted as they read 
their invitations. 

“T should say we are honored!” Rip exclaimed, as 
he slapped Elmer on the back. | 

“You write the club president,’ said Elmer, “will 
you, Rip?—and accept for both of us, with many and. 
sincere thanks, and put it nice now, you old dub!” 

The food of the commons had been good, and they, 
would probably eat there again, but this invitation, 
from the Fellowship Club was too flattering a thing to 
think of passing up. It showed that these two boys 
were lifting their heads before the multitude. They 
went to their first club lunch that noon and found, 
half a dozen other chaps also taking their first meal 
there. The members of the Fellowship Club were 
warmly cordial in their welcome, and Elmer felt a 
sense of comfort and relaxation as he sat down in the 





“ 


IT’S ALL IN THE GAME 93 


club room after lunch and “fanned” with the other 
fellows on the big things of interest to the student 
body. Several faculty men ate at the Fellowship 
Club, and one of them was Professor Noon. Elmer 
had an idea that probably Professor Noon was re- 
sponsible, more than anyone else, for his admittance. 

As the second team lined up for scrimmage that 
afternoon, Coach Brown again placed Durley in the 
backfield with Credon. | 

“Gosh, wouldn’t that get your goat!” said Elmer 
to Credon. 

“Tt certainly does,” replied Credon. ‘That fellow 
gives me a big pain in the neck.” 

“Well,” advised Elmer, “let’s not pay any more 
attention to him. We will take care of our jobs, and 
if he doesn’t take care of his, why should we worry?” 

The Freshmen ripped up the second string team in 
great shape that afternoon, and in fifteen minutes had 
scored two touchdowns. Electrified to activity, the 
second team came back and marched down the field 
to the five yard line in an irresistible fury. The next 
play Elmer called was a plunge by the fullback, in 
which Elmer’s duty was merely to protect to the side. 
In the midst of the play he suddenly felt a body hit 
him right on the knee from the side. A twinge of 
pain shot through his leg up past his hip, and he col- 
lapsed to the ground. But quickly, as he went down, 
he turned his head and out of the corner of his eye 
he saw Durley rolling away and finally rise to his 
feet. It was Durley, then, who had done it—one of 
his own college mates! 


7 


94 FOUR WINNERS : 


Elmer tried to get to his feet. His right leg, 
wouldn’t move. The first man to notice him was a, 
Freshman back. I 

“Higgins is hurt!” he yelled. : 

An instant later Elmer heard Coach Brown’s voice 
as he ran up to him. “What’s the matter, Higgins?, 
What happened?” 

As they helped Elmer to his feet it was evident to 
him that no one had seen the incident. His first im-, 
pulse was to blurt out the truth, but he checked. 
himself just in time. | 

“T don’t know,” he said. “Somebody clipped me. 
from the side.” | 

“Walk around,” advised Coach Brown. “Maybe it 
will work out.” ) 

Elmer tried to take one step, but it was no go. 
He would have collapsed but for the two men holding 
him up. Old Dad Moore, the trainer, and two Fresh-. 
men helped Elmer over to the hospital, where he was 
comfortably put to bed awaiting the arrival of the, 
doctor. | 

The doctor, arriving shortly, made a brief examina- 
tion, then ia the knee so that Elmer howled in 
pain. 

“The internal cartilage is badly torn, but I just put 
it back in place. Some of the ligaments are torn, too, 
I am afraid. You won’t be able to play any more 
football this year.” 

“Couldn’t I possibly get in by the time the last 
game is played against Aksarben?” pleaded Elmer. 

“Well, maybe so,” the doctor answered soothingly. 





(i 


‘ 
IT’S ALL IN THE GAME 95 


“But let’s forget about that for the present. You 
have absolutely got to stay off this knee for at least 
two weeks—but maybe the knee is not nearly so bad 
as we think.” 

Life in the hospital was not at all as hard as Elmer 
feared. The coach and the members of the team came 
up every evening, also the chaps from the Fellowship 
Club. He received good care and fine meals, and 
spent quite a bit of his time reading his law books. 
Both the Fellowship Club and the football squad 
sent him up flowers, and fruit, and there was also a 
bouquet from Estelle Wilson. He was surprised that 
she still remembered him, as he had not seen her since 
the previous spring. The only thought which both- 
ered Elmer was regarding the folks at home. Coach 
Brown had talked to the local reporter, and the only 
story which ran in the paper was to the effect “on 
the second team Quarterback Higgins had been re- 
placed by Edwards,” with no further explanation. 
This gave Elmer a chance to write home and explain 
that he had received a slight injury and for them not 
to worry at all, as he would soon be fit and active 
again. The home folks evidently took him literally, 
for Mr. Higgins even wrote to the effect that “now 
that you’ve failed to make the team, you ought to 
quit it entirely, and concentrate on your law work.” 

Elmer read all the magazine and newspapers which 
were brought to him, and the sporting news from 
downstate which was full of the gloating accounts of 
the great team State was having under Coach Smith. 
It boomed Hunk Hughes for All-American halfback, 


96 : FOUR WINNERS 


and Coach Smith was hailed as the miracle man 
With every word that Elmer read about Coach Smith: 
he ground his teeth, and cursed his own bad luck. He 
received the returns of the Kingston game by radic 
in his own room, and the seven to nothing victory: 
he hailed with delight. The team to him had per- 
sonality and soul, and he was with it in mind and 
spirit if not in body. As the account of the game 
came over the radio, he played every play with a 
fervor and intensity that both shocked and delighted 
the hospital staff. 

Two weeks after he was injured he was able to 
walk out, but the knee was weak and had practically 
no strength. He attended his classes that day, and 
that afternoon he put on a suit again and appeared 
on the field. 

“Tl just play around for about a week,” Elmer 
said to Coach Brown, “because this knee of mine 
feels rather perky, and the doctor says I mustn’t do 
anything with it for another week or so, so as to give 
it a chance to strengthen.” 

“You do just as the doctor tells you,” said Brown. 
“And be very careful with it. And, by the way, I 
want to go over and have a chat with you one of these 
nights—I have something important I want to talk 
to you about.” 

At eight o’clock that very evening there was a 
knock at the door and Coach Brown strode in, carry- 
ing some papers in his hands. 

“I want to talk with Higgins here, alone,” said 
the Coach. 


IT’S ALL IN THE GAME 97 


“You betcha,” responded Rip. “T’ll get right out 
of here and go next door;” and out he went. 

The coach sat tapping with his lead pencil on the 
papers for a moment before he spoke. Finally he 
said, “Higgins, if I ask you a fair question, will you 
promise me to answer honestly, and with no attempt 
to cover anything up?” 

“Certainly!” replied Elmer. Cover anything up? 
He had no idea what the coach was driving at. 

“Was the man who clipped you from the side, the » 
time you were hurt, Durley, your own halfback?” 

Somewhat frightened, Elmer hesitated; then he 
stammered. “Uh, uh, I think it was.” 

“Can you say for certain?” Coach Brown’s eyes 
were piercing right into Elmer’s soul. “This is a very 
Important matter and I must know.” 

“Yes, I am certain,” Elmer finally replied. “But I 
hope you don’t think that I’m a tattle-tale.”’ 

“This is no time for false heroics,’ snapped the 
coach, ‘for here I have a letter from the Aksarben 
coach, in which he states that he received anony- 
mously a copy of our plays and signals. He inclosed 
them with the remark that I ought to know about it, 
as there is evidently a traitor in camp.” 

“No one could have sent these plays out except 
someone on the squad, as my own coaches are abso- 
lutely loyal. We are lucky that the Aksarben coach 
is a gentleman or this would have ruined our chances 
for the game. As it is, I intend to change the system 
of signals, but not until I have made sure of the cul- 
prit. 


98 | FOUR WINNERS 


“T didn’t see the play in which you got hurt, but I! 
heard about your fight with Durley. I also left Dur-’ 
ley at home at the time of the Kingston trip and re-! 
ports came to me of some very low criticism which: 
Durley has made of me personally. As I said, I: 
didn’t see the play in which you were hurt, but I did: 
notice how pleased Durley was later in the day, after 
you were hurt. I believe he is our man and in fact, | 
after what you say, I am sure of it. However, I do 
not want you to breathe a word of this to anyone.” | 

Brown went a few minutes later, and he was. 
scarcely gone before Rip was back in the room. 

“What did the coach want to see you about?” he. 
asked Elmer, all curiosity. 

“He was just inquiring about my knee,” lied Elmer. 

“Umph,” said Rip, “it’s AE he Libba i inquire 
about your knee in my presence.” 

“T promised not to say anything,” apologized Elmer. 

“Huh,” said Rip, “Tl find out some way or other, 
and I have a sneaky feeling in the bones that this 
has something to do with our cold-blooded friend 
Durley.” 

Elmer made no reply, but he knew that his face 
was giving him away to his chum. The rest of the 
evening was spent in silence. 

Only two unimportant games remaining before the 
big game with Aksarben, the team was working rather 
easily now, and no one took things more easily than 
Elmer. One warm night, however, his knee feeling 
fairly good, he was racing after a forward pass, as 
they were informally playing around the field, when 


IT’S ALL IN THE GAME o9 


he felt something pop in his knee and the next in- 
stant he was lying prostrate on the ground. As he 
tried to get up he found that his right leg was just as 
useless as ever, and a twinge of pain shot through 
the knee and the full length of the leg. That night 
the doctor told him that he would need another week 
of complete rest, though he could go to his classes 
on crutches. 

“You better scratch football entirely for this year, 
and it may be that in another year your knee will be 
Bik.” 

Elmer’s heart sank at that, but he tried to take the 
situation philosophically. 

“There’s no use fighting about this sort of thing,” 
he said to Rip. ‘All I can do is make the best of it.” 


CHAPTER X 
SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 


HE night of his second accident, Elmer hobbled 

over to see Professor Noon, to explain to him 
why a substitute would probably do the sweeping in 
the Science Building for the next week or ten days. 
The kindly old professor was very sympathetic. _ 

“T believe in athletics for the young man,” he said, 
“but not to extremes. From what you have told me 
regarding your injury I believe the wise thing for you 
in the future is to confine yourself to such sports as 
will not endanger the condition of your knee.” 

“The doctor,” Elmer explained, “said it will be all 
right by next fall, and I’m going to play it safely and 
take it easy until then.” 

“T don’t like to dash cold water on your hopes,” 
said Professor Noon, “but if I were you I would pre- 
pare myself mentally for the probability that pos- 
sibly you will never play football again. I say that 
in all seriousness. You are just a youngster, and you 
have a fine future in law ahead of you, as your pro- 
fessors tell me that you have a legal mind and a fine 
presence and forethought when you get up to talk.” 

“Thanks,” Elmer answered modestly; “but I just 
can’t help it. Professor! I’d give anything to make 

100 


SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 101 


that football team next year. I think it would do 
me the world of good‘to satisfy that one ambition. I 
know it would give me confidence in whatever [ 
tackled seriously afterwards.” 

The old professor leaned back in his chair, strum- 
ming his fingers on the table for a minute or two. “I 
believe that athletics are all right, up to a certain de- 
gree,” he said. “One of the primary functions of a 
college is to help a young man find himself. There 
is no doubt that a lot of fine traits of character are 
developed by athletics. However, it is not an entity 
in itself, and if I were you I would merely get inter- 
ested in some other activities; go out a little more 
socially, and keep your mind occupied so that you 
won’t miss your contacts on the field. And it may 
still be that you can play next fall; but it is good 
philosophy to always be prepared for the worst.” 

Elmer went back to his room that night so dis- 
couraged that only the most intense concentration on 
his studies saved him from a complete case of the 
blues. He studied hard that night and the night fol- 
lowing. The third night, however, he found his 
thoughts wandering. 

“Gee,” he suddenly remarked to Rip, turning to 
that young man who was busily writing a letter, 
“this inactivity is getting on my nerves! I’ve got to 
be doing something, or I’ll explode.” 

“Stars are supposed to have temperament,” replied 
Rip dryly. He always enjoyed teasing Elmer a little. 
“But I don’t see where you have any right to be de- 
veloping any such symptoms.” 


102 | FOUR WINNERS 


“What a nice friendly roommate you are!”’ i 
Elmer. “When I talk to you again, I’ll let you SA 
And he went to bed. 

The next noon at the Fellowship Club, Rip came 
over smilingly and slapped him on the back. 

“T’ll tell you what let’s do, Elmer, let’s take in the 
Fellowship Club formal next week.” 

“But I have no girl friend.” 

“No, I suppose not,” said Rip. “However, there’s 
a shy young lady whom you have been neglecting 
terribly for the last year or so, who might be per- 
suaded to waste an evening with you, and I am the 
man who will persuade her, so it’s all fixed. Here we 
go.” 

The Fellowship Club gave formal dinner dances 
several times a year, and this was the first one of 
the present season. At six-thirty on the evening of 
the dance Rip came driving up in a car. He walked 
into the room with a flourish. 

“We're all ready,” he exclaimed. “Let’s go.” 

“What’s that thing you have out in front there, 
and what’s it for?” queried Elmer. 

“Tt belongs to a friend of mine, and we're taking 
the girls to the hop in it,” replied the big tackle. 

“But [ve already ordered a cab,’ Elmer explained. 
“And besides, isn’t it rather an affront to ask girls 
to ride in a contraption like that?” 

“Cancel the cab,’ said Rip, “and shut up, and 
come along. These secondhand cars are all the 
vogue, and the girls will think it’s a jolly lift—in fact 
the first time I get fifty dollars I’m going to buy one 


SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 103 


of my own. Furthermore, we can’t afford to be pay- 
ing five dollars a lick for cab bills, as long as we have 
friends who are good enough to loan us a convey- 
ance.” 

Elmer looked over the contraption and found a 
big red lantern hanging on behind, two spare tires tied 
on the top, a lot of curt phrases painted on the body, 
and hung on behind a sign, “In every day and every 
way I am growing weaker and weaker.” 

“All right,” he said, after he had hesitated a mo- 
ment. “Crank it up!” 

They stopped first at the house where Rip’s friend 
lived, and when she came out and saw the car she 
laughed gaily. “My, right up to date!” 

“Nothing’s too good for the ladies!” was Rip’s jolly 
retort. 

Arriving at the Wilson home, Elmer pressed the 
button with beating heart, and found Estelle all 
dressed and waiting. 

“My, I haven’t seen you in goodness knows how 
long,” she said, as she gave him her hand in greeting. 

“Well,” stammered Elmer, “you know how it is 
with us football men.” 

“Yes, how is it?” queried Estelle. 

There was an awkward pause. 

“T understand you have been hurt again. I’m 
sorry.” 

Elmer stammered his thanks. They approached the 
car, and he wondered what Estelle would think of 
it. But she, too, joined heartily in the fun of it all, 


104 : FOUR WINNERS 


and the next instant they were whirling along the 
road toward the downtown district. | 

The dining room at the hotel was beautifully dec-' 
orated, as were also the tables, making a handsome 
setting for the Fellowship dinner. At first Elmer 
was somewhat ill at ease in the conversation during 
the dinner; it was Estelle who had to take the initia- 
tive. 

“What are you going to do with yourself, Mr. Hig- 
gins, now that you won’t be able to play any more 
football this fall?” she asked. 

“It was quite a blow, and time does hang heavy on 
my hands.” 

“He will probably be down to see you real often, 
now,” blurted out Rip. And this last remark threw 
Elmer completely off his social stride again. He gave 
Rip a look which spoke, “Help me out!” 

Rip, however, seemed to be enjoying himself im- 
mensely. After an awkward pause, Rip was at it 
again, “Wouldn’t it be a good idea, girls, if Elmer 
took both of you to the Aksarben game?” 

“It would certainly be a pleasure,” quickly spoke 
up Elmer, though the very mention of the game, fol- 
lowing Hstelle’s inquiries about his injury, set the old 
train of thought going in his head again. Would he 
be ever able to play again? Had Professor Noon 
told him the horrible truth? Estelle’s voice broke his 
revery. 

“IT am sure it would be delightful,” she said, while 
Rip’s friend volunteered that she would “just love to 
go.” 


| SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 105 


ia the dinner there was an intermission of fif- 
teen minutes, while the tables were being cleared 
away for dancing. Although neither Rip nor Elmer 
smoked, they both excused themselves and went out 
into the alcove and joined the men gathered there in 
groups. 

“T could have killed you,” said Elmer to Rip. “You 
know I am no ‘lady’s man.’ ” 

Rip laughed. “You are all wrong on this blushing 
bashful stuff,’ he said. ‘They like them bold and 
fearless. Say anything that comes to your mind— 
they never take you seriously anyhow.” 

“Well, I’m not made that way,” said Elmer. “The 
more I think of it the less I like this job of taking 
these girls to the game.” 

“Shucks, it’s just what you need,” Rip continued. 
“Don’t take them so seriously. Just go around a few 
times and your point of view will change entirely.” 

“That may be all right,” said Elmer, “but please, 
for the rest of the night, no more of this airy persi- 
flage at my expense.” 

However, Rip’s remarks did do some good, for EI- 
mer forgot himself completely during the rest of the 
evening and had a jolly good time. He became truly 
unconscious of himself until after the dance and the 
four of them piled back into the so-called car. Al- 
though quite a few of the other chaps had cars of a 
like model and vintage, Elmer could not help but feel 
that it would have been much more appropriate to 
have spent some money for taxicabs. 

“T have just had a lovely time,” said Estelle. “You 


106 FOUR WINNERS 


boys and your crowd are so delightful that one cannot 
help but enjoy them. Come over and see me some’ 
evening when you are not too busy, won’t you?” |! 

“Thank you,” said Elmer, rather lamely, “I shall.” 
But in his heart he knew he lied. He knew he would 
never have the courage to go all by himself to see 
Estelle; and yet, as if against his own wishes, he! 
caught himself wishing that in some way or other his: 
bold friend Rip might sometime arrange a mutual af-: 
fair which would bring them all together again. 

Several days later, at noon, Rip brought the infor- | 
mation that Durley, for reasons unknown, had left 
the university. Elmer never got any first-hand infor-. 
mation about this. Naturally he was glad that cer- 
tain things that he knew of were nipped in the bud; 
yet in his heart he was sorry and disillusioned to find 
that there were boys in the world who wouldn’t play 
the game fairly. On several occasions he was tempted 
to ask the coach about it, but after deliberation he de- 
cided that whatever information the coach wanted 
him to have he would volunteer himself. Coach 
Brown never mentioned the matter again; and in his 
heart of hearts Elmer admired him deeply for that. 
It was a life lesson in reticence that Elmer never 
forgot. 

The same night that brought news of Durley’s 
leaving, several boys in the same dormitory came 
over to tell Elmer and Rip that they had run across 
quite by accident, a bunch of very unsophisticated 
freshmen whom they had decided to initiate into the 
imaginary Order of the Black Cat. Elmer wasn’t 


SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 107 


able to go along on account of some cramming he had 
to do for a law class, but Rip went and came back with 
the report that supplied a lot of fun at the expense 
of the freshmen. 

“The poor saps paid in fifteen dollars apiece, three 
of them, which makes a total of forty-five dollars. 
This, I presume, we will use for a special feed. Each 
one of the candidates had to go over to the Gym 
blindfolded and stripped save for a towel, and carry- 
ing a dead black cat. We gave them the violet ray 
machine on the chest. We also burnt some hairs un- 
der their nose, while we pressed a piece of ice against 
the skin. You would have laughed your head off 
to see the way they jumped! They thought surely 
they were being branded with a red hot iron. Then 
we made them climb through a row of barrels, put 
end to end, coming through either side. They had a 
terrible time passing each other blindfolded.” 

“Aren’t you kind of ashamed of yourselves, to take 
fifteen dollars away from each of those poor kids?” 

“Not at all,” said Rip. “All of them have money— 
that’s one reason we picked them. They can charge 
it to education. Believe me, when they wise up 
they'll appreciate that they received a liberal educa- 
tion very cheaply. These greenies have to be wised 
up some way or other. We may as well be the ones to 
do it.” 

“Well, the next time you have something of that 
sort, I hope I can get in on it,” said Elmer. 

“Well, we have another live one on for next week— 


108 FOUR WINNERS 


areal one. A few of the fellows are oe him along: 
They’ve styled him the marble champion.” i 

“The marble champion?” 

“Yes, the marble champion. What do you think 
of that? In quizzing one of these freshmen one day, | 
one of the boys accidentally found a young gent whose’ 
only claim to fame in his grammar school and high’ 
school days was the fact that he was much feared 
whenever the boys played marbles for keeps! Think’ 
of it, Elmer! The marble champion! Of course, all’ 
the fellows got right in on the idea, patted him on the’ 
back, and told him he was just the fellow they were’ 
looking for. The last marble champion had been grad-. 
uated, and it looked as though the school would be 
weak in this form of sport this year. The poor chap 
fell for it hook, line and sinker, and Wednesday after- 
noon he is going to play against Jipper Gite, for the 
championship of the school. Oh, boy!” And Rip 
exploded, and danced a Jig. 

“Well, I certainly won’t miss that,” said Elmer. 
Jipper Gite was the school comedian, and Elmer could, 
see the possibilities of such a contest. | 

The following Wednesday at one o’clock they met 
over behind the chemistry building. There were a. 
thousand students there, and the Varsity cheer leader. 
gave nine rahs for Hericks, the coming marble cham-: 
pion. When the referee introduced Jipper Gite, who» 
was to contest against Hericks, everybody cat-called 
and hooted him, and Hericks’s bosom swelled. He: 
felt he had the whole university back of him. Rip was\ 


: 
: 


SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 109 


the master of ceremonies, and called the two men to 
the center of the ring. 

“T demand that we use the Egyptian break,” said 
Jipper Gite solemnly. 

“All right,” said Rip, and turning around and ad- 
dressing an assistant he said, “Fix the pool balls up 
in a pyramid.” 

The two men lagged for a line to determine the one 
who would get first shot. Jipper Gite was the winner. 
Jipper crouched down at the edge of the circle, with 
his pool ball, and hitting the top ball of the pyramid 
knocked it completely out of the circle. As he did so 
a thousand voices shouted “Foul!” 

“T never fouled,” said Jipper, burlesquing a very 
offended attitude. 

“You fudged,” said Rip, and awarded the next shot 
to Hericks. 

Hericks leaned down on the edge of the circle, and 
picking on the nearest pool ball knocked it out of the 
circle, a very simple thing to do. He then proceeded 
to knock out two more, while the crowd cheered vocif- 
erously. 

“Speech, speech, speech!” called the crowd. 

“Since I have won the championship of the school,” 
said Hericks throwing out his chest, “I will now go 
into training for the big match with the champ of 
Aksarben. Dulac need have no fear, as I have never 
lost a marble game in my life .. .” 

Another loud cheer broke out at this, but it sud- 
denly stopped for just at the moment up strode the 
president of the university into the group. The stu- 


110 FOUR WINNERS 


dents backed away, so that the president came right up 
to the place where Rip, Jipper Gite, Hericks and El- 
mer were standing together. 

“T had heard that this sort of nonsense was going 
to go on, but I wouldn’t have believed it unless I saw 
it with my own eyes.” Turning to Hericks, he said, 
“Young man, don’t you know that these fellows here 
are making a big fool out of you?” 

“Oh, they told me about you,” retorted Hericks, 
blandly, with a smile, “and they said you’d be jealous 
because you were the marble champion when you 
were in school.” 

The crowd nearly burst with suppressed laughter. 

“Where are you from?” asked the president. 

“What Cheer, Indiana,” responded Hericks proudly. 

“Mr. Ruggles, Mr. Higgins, and Mr. Gite,” said the 
president, as he turned away, “I will see you up in my 
office in five minutes.” 

Five minutes later the three culprits were escorted 
into the president’s sanctum sanctorum. The presi- 
dent tried to look severe, but a little “squib” of a 
smile crept around the corners of his mouth. 

“Tell me all about this, Mr. Ruggles—you seemed 
to be the leading spirit out there.” 

Rip, very frankly, told the whole case, and explained 
that they had no harm in mind, just merely a little 
rough way of enlightening and humiliating some of 
the freshmen who were too chesty anyhow. 

“This must stop at once,” said the president. 
“There is no doubt in my mind but what this young 
freshman, Hericks, needs a lot of enlightening, but 


SOCIAL CHAMPIONS—AND OTHERS 111 


he will have to get it in other ways. I have no doubt 
that he will be a very much more enlightened young 
fellow by tomorrow. Boys will be boys, but you were 
carrying this thing much too far today. It’s ridicu- 
lous, and it’s wasting time. You three boys have 
splendid records, and I will overlook it this time. But 
remember, no more of it.” 

As they passed out and on across the campus 
grounds all three of them heaved a big sigh of relief, 
and voted then and there that Prexy was a regular 
fellow. 

“T thought sure it was good-bye Dulac for me,” said 
Gite. 

“IT felt safe as soon as I saw him smile,” said Rip, 
“and I think he relented when I told him the whole 
truth. However, this physical examination that we 
were going to stage tomorrow night is off. I’ll take 
the stethoscope back to the doctor tonight, and we'll 
return their dollars to those freshies.” 

“IT think you’re wise,’ said Elmer. “Anyone of 
those fool freshmen might have had you arrested for 
impersonating a physician, you know.” 

“Well, I may be wrong,” was Rip’s final word, “but 
I do think all these freshmen were getting some good 
education at a cut rate—but I guess Prexy doesn’t get 
our point of view.” 


CHAPTER XI 
FROM THE GRANDSTAND 


HE night before the Aksarben game all of the 
: hotels in town were overcrowded, and the con- 
gestion became greater every hour as the crowds rolled 
in from all directions. Coach Brown had taken his 
entire squad out to the Country Club to keep them 
away from the noise and excitement of the town and 
school, so Elmer was left alone. Having completed 
his studying by about nine o’clock, he strolled down | 
town, but found things very quiet except in the hotel 
lobbies, where groups of alumni and fans stood around 
discussing the morrow’s game. 

One look around was enough to satisfy Elmer’s curi- 
osity. On the long walk back to the college, he passed 
Estelle’s house, and did his best to get up enough cour- 
age to go and ring the doorbell. However, his nerve 
failed him at the last instant, and he continued on 
his way out to the college. The various buildings 
looked like vast ships at sea in the thick gloom as he 
came up the long avenue. There were very few 
lights lit; the morrow was a holiday; almost every 
student was away for the evening. There was some- 
thing lonely about the place. 


Elmer went to his room and lying back in bed re- 
112 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 113 


viewed the events of the past fall. He kept wondering 
why it was that he didn’t seem to get any of the 
breaks in luck. Here was a game tomorrow, where it | 
was reasonably certain that Dulac would beat Aksar- 
ben, a game in which, he felt sure, Coach Brown 
would send out the shock team to play the first quar- 
ter. If he had not been injured it would have meant 
that he would be out there on the field doing that 
which he enjoyed above anything else in the world. 
But no; he was here with an injured knee; he would 
have to watch the game from the stands. It was hard! 
He felt suddenly as if he had not even had his chance 
yet. His work as quarterback up to the time of his 
injury, while above the ordinary, had not caused a 
ripple, and the recurrence of his injury was not even 
of enough importance to be noticed. Sick at heart, 
he tossed about in his bed, and it was long past mid- 
night before he finally fell asleep. 

The next morning found a thick heavy frost on the 
ground, and a snappy tang in the air. The sun broke 
through the clouds about nine o’clock and every ves- 
tige of frost soon disappeared; it was evident that 
conditions for the game would be ideal. About eleven- 
thirty the Varsity squad arrived on a bus from the 
Country Club. Elmer met the bus; he couldn’t stay 
away. He took in every word, even to hearing Coach 
Brown give instructions for the entire team to eat a 
very light lunch and be back at the Gym in an hour. 

“The team is in great shape,” said Rip, as he walked 
toward the Fellowship Club with Elmer, “but Coach 
Brown seems to think we are a little over-confident. 


114 | FOUR WINNERS 


He had a deuce of a time keeping the alumni and the 
relatives away from the players last night.” 

“Yes, I know,” said Elmer, “the coach is a great 
stickler for keeping everybody away from the team 
until after the game, no matter who it is. How about 
Credon?: Will he get in the game today?” 

“T don’t know, for sure,” replied Rip, “but I think 
he will start with the shock bunch.” 

“T understand that there are no tickets to be had, 
and that there are rumors of scalping.” 

“Well, here are your three,” said Rip, as he pulled 
them out of his pocket, “but I surely had a tough 
time getting them. There must have been a thou- 
sand people out to the Country Club last night, all 
trying to get tickets from Coach Brown, as though he 
had anything to do with the ticket sale!” 

“Thanks, Rip. These are a great load off my mind,” 
said Elmer, as he carefully deposited the tickets in his 
vest pocket. “I’ll be running along now,” and as he 
gripped Rip by the hand, “don’t forget,” he said, “the 
walloping Aksarben gave us last year.” 

“T won't,’ said Rip, “but too many of the fellows 
seem to think we are going to have a cinch, to suit 
me.” 

Elmer went back to the room, shaved and dressed 
himself, and rolling up the two army blankets which 
- he and Rip used on their beds, he slipped them under 
his arm and strolled toward town. 

There was one ideal custom at Dulac. Owing to 
the nearness of the university field, and the lack of 
adequate parking facilities, everybody from town 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 115 


walked out. Elmer called first for Rip’s friend, Ruth, 
and then, picking up Estelle at her home, they joined 
the vast army which was slowly making its way out 
towards Ludington Field. Arriving at the field, El- 
mer passed by without effort all the venders that were 
trying to sell the various novelties, though he did 
finally buy each one of the girls a large chrysanthe- 
mum, and, of course, a program. Then they were 
shown up to their seats. 

The seats which Rip had procured for them were 
in the very top row, on about the forty yard line. 

“Don’t you think this is rather high up, and a little 
too far away to see the game well?” Ruth asked. 

“T procured these seats up here,” Elmer explained, 
a little uncomfortably, “because these are supposed 
to afford the best view. The football scouts always 
sit in the top row, because everything lies out in front 
of them like a panorama.” 

“T think these seats are lovely,” said Estelle, and 
the remark pleased Elmer not a little, although it was 
still apparent that Ruth was not satisfied. 

Slowly and gradually the vast stands became filled 
with the throng in holiday clothes and holiday spirit. 
Into the east stand marched one thousand Aksarben 
rooters led by a band in brilliant red uniforms. They 
had just arrived on a special train. After the Aksar- 
ben band had marched up and down the field the 
Dulac band came in and they had their strut up and 
down the field playing their stirring march, which had 
such a swing and a stimulus to it that it gripped every- 
one who heard it. Elmer felt a thrill of pride in the 


116 | FOUR WINNERS 


band, and the old march, as the drum major waved his 
baton up and down the field. 

At a quarter of two the Aksarben cheer leaders sud- 
denly appeared in their bright red sweaters, and an 
instant later nine rahs for Dulac volleyed across the 
field. The Dulac cheer leaders returned the salute in 
an instant, and in another minute both cheering sec- 
tions were giving their best efforts at one and the same 
time. There was a lull for a few moments and then 
suddenly pandemonium broke loose in the Aksarben 
stands as the three big teams in red came snorting 
on the field. They ran up and down the field with a 
speed and dash that spelled determination and boded 
ill for Dulac. Three minutes later, the Dulac team 
appeared and Elmer and the girls yelled themselves 
hoarse, as they saw the old boys in blue tripping up 
and down the gridiron. The four officials in white 
flannel trousers and jerseys of various descriptions ap- 
peared next, calling both captains to the middle of — 
the field. 

“What are they doing now?” Ruth asked. 

“Why, the referee is tossing up the coin, and which- 
ever captain wins the toss gets his choice.” 

“Get’s his choice of what?” 

“The choice of kicking off or defending the goal. 
But with this brisk wind I imagine whichever cap- 
tain wins will elect to take the wind.” 

It was soon evident that the Dulac captain had 
won the toss and had taken the wind, the kickoff thus 
going to the Aksarben captain. The air was filled 
with such a din and noise it was almost impossible to 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 117 


hear one another’s conversation. Close behind, and to 
one side, in the press stand, could be heard the click- 
ing of the telegraph instruments. The sport writers 
were sending out to the world the story of the game. 
In a cubby hole at the very end of the press stand, 
Elmer could see the announcer from a downtown 
newspaper, broadcasting the game by radio. 

Dulac was all lined up to receive the kick-off—there 
was a shrill whistle as the referee put the instrument 
to his lips, and an instant later the Aksarben fullback 
met the ball squarely and it soared onward right into 
the arms of Jones, the Dulac fullback. The Dulac 
team dropped back, formed a wedge for Jones, and 
behind this flying phalanx Jones was not stopped un- 
til he reached his thirty yard line. On the first down 
Dulac dropped back into punt formation, and Jones 
sent the ball soaring fifty yards down the field. The 
Aksarben quarterback was tackled dead in his tracks. 

“Why did they kick right away?” asked Ruth. 

“That’s to utilize the wind to the best advantage,” 
Elmer explained. ‘Now it’s up to Aksarben to see 
what they can do with their backs up against their 
own goal line. They can only kick it back, and it — 
won’t go nearly as far against the wind.” 

Aksarben tried two line plays, and gaining but a 
total of three yards, dropped back on third down, 
and punted to midfield. Edwards fumbled the ball 
for an instant, but recovered it, though there was no 
return. On the first play Credon went off tackle for 
six yards, and the ball was brought back, and the ref- 
eree walked back five yards for Aksarben. 


118 . FOUR WINNERS 


“What’s that for?” asked Ruth. 

“That’s a five yard penalty for being offside. There 
is an imaginary line drawn through each end of the 
ball, clear across the field. One line is the line of 
scrimmage for the team which has the ball, and the 
other line is the line of scrimmage for the team on 
the defense. Neither team could cross its line of 
scrimmage until the ball is passed by the center, or 
there is a penalty of five yards. The team which has 
the ball dare not be in motion when the ball is passed 
back by the center. On that last shift play, Dulac was 
off too fast, and that’s the reason for the penalty.” 
In the meanwhile Dulac had tried a forward pass 
and this was incomplete. As they lined up, the score 
board showed second down, fifteen yards to go. An- 
other forward pass went astray; this time as they 
lined up the score board showed third down, fifteen. 


The maneuver of trying two forward passes in suc-_ 


cession rather puzzled Elmer, and he couldn’t for the 


life of him grasp the reason for such strategy on the 
part of Edwards. On the next play Jones dropped 
back in punt formation, and placed a beautiful punt 


to one side which rolled out of bounds on the five 


yard line. This feat was greeted with loud cheers 


from the Dulac cheering section. 
“What was so exciting about that, that made them 
all yell?” Ruth asked. 


| 


“Well,” said Elmer, “the way it is now, it is Aksar- 


ben’s ball on their own five yard line. If the ball had 
rolled across the goal line before it went out of bounds 
it would have been a touchback. In that case it would 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 119 


have been Aksarben’s ball on the twenty yard line— 
so by kicking the ball out on the five yard line, they 
saved fifteen yards.” 

“Just as clear as mud,” said Ruth. 

“Don’t say that, Ruth,” Estelle put in. “You know 
it’s just as clear as can be.” 

But Ruth only pouted. 

Standing five yards behind his own goal line the 
Aksarben kicker, on the first play, now hoisted the 
ball fifty yards up the field, right into the arms of the 
waiting Edwards. The ball seemed to nestle in his 
arms and then an instant later it lay squirming on the 
ground. Like a flash a red-jerseyed man was around 
it. 

“Shucks, we fumbled, and Aksarben recovered— 
that’s a bad break!” Elmer exclaimed. 

“What is a break?” Once more Ruth’s battery of 
questions was turned on. 

“Well, that’s rather hard to define,’ Elmer an- 
swered, ‘“‘but a blocked kick or a fumbled punt or any 
kind of a fumble is supposed to represent a break for 
the team that recovers the ball.” 

In two plays Aksarben had smashed for a first down, 
right straight through the Dulac scrub line. On the 
next play they fumbled, however, and the Dulac cen- 
ter recovered, making it Dulac’s ball on her own forty- 
five yard line. 

“Well, that evens it up—that’s a break for us,” said 
Elmer. 

On the first play Credon for Dulac skirted the end 
for twenty yards, but the completion of the play found 


120 | FOUR WINNERS 


the official standing where the ball had started froth 
and again the ball was brought back. This time the 
referee measured off fifteen yards. | 

“What was that for?” said Ruth. 

“That was for holding,” gloomily responded Elmer. 
“The team that has the ball is not allowed to use its 
hands or arms in any way, and the penalty for doing 
this is fifteen yards.” | 

“But the Aksarben boys were using their hands— 
I could see that very plainly,” said Ruth. | 

“Yes, that’s true,” said Elmer, “but the rules say 
that the team on defense may use their hands to 
ward off interferers, while they are attempting to get 
to the man carrying the ball. It is only the team 
which ste the ball which is not allowed to use its hands 
or arms.’ 

“Does that mean that the team on defense can 
slug?” asked Estelle, in wide-eyed wonder. | 

“No, if the team on defense uses its hands illegiti- 
mately, such as striking with the heel of the hand in 
the face, or slugging, they’ll get penalized fifteen, 
yards, and the man may be put out of the game.” _ 

Meantime Dulac had again tried two long forward 
passes, both of which were incomplete, and on the 
third down Jonesy kicked a long punt down the field, 
which the Aksarben quarterback caught on his own 
twenty yard line, sidestepped the Dulac end, and re- 
turned the ball ten yards before he was smothered | 
under a swarm of blue jerseys. Starting on their own 
twenty yard line Aksarben now reeled off three first 
downs in succession. In one of these plays the offi-. 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 121 


cials stepped forth and the referee walked for five more 
yards for Aksarben. 

“What was that for?” asked Ruth. 

“Oh, let’s keep quiet—I think we’re annoying EI- 
mer, and he isn’t enjoying the game a bit,” said Es- 
telle. 

“Oh, that’s all right,” said Elmer. “I am at your 
pleasure. Dulac was offside that time, Ruth.” 

“Thank you,” said Ruth, but not without a look at 
Hstelle, whose remark apparently had hit home; for 
from then on until the Aksarben team reached the 
twenty yard line, Ruth asked no more questions. 

At this point eleven new blue-jerseyed men dashed 
onto the field, and Ruth joined in with the rest of the 
vast throng in exhorting Dulac to hold. 

“We'll see a different game now,” said Elmer, “the 
regulars are in.” 

Three plays—Aksarben shot two inside of tackle 
and one outside of tackle, and not an inch did they 
gain in the three downs. 

“They'll have to make ten yards on the next play 
or it will be our ball,” said Elmer. 

He could see the Dulac backfield move back further 
so as to be in a more advantageous position to pro- 
tect against a forward pass. The Aksarben quarter- 
back was clearly flustered, and up in the air. 

“Well, we have stopped them this time,” said El- 
mer. “Just watch that team go when they get the 
ball.” 

At that instant the ball was snapped back by the 
Aksarben center, and the Aksarben halfback dropped 


122 | FOUR WINNERS 


back, throwing a forward pass to their left end, who’ 
had run straight down the field to the goal line. El-} 
mer’s nerves gave a jump; just then he saw Shorty’ 
Dunne leap clean into the air, and bat the ball. 

“Good for Shorty!” thought Elmer; and then his’ 
heart sank as he saw that Shorty had batted the ball’ 
right into the hands of an Aksarben halfback who was 
coming down the field several yards behind the end. 
The halfback hung onto the ball and crossed the goal 
line, while Elmer felt a lonely and empty sensation’ 
all Me way to the pit of his stomach. The Aksar-| 
ben team lined up on the five yard line, and executing. 
a perfect place kick added the extra point, reset | 
the score seven to nothing in their favor. 

“Just a bad break,” said Elmer, “just a bad break. | 

“T know, but it’s coven to nothing favor Aksarben.” 

Elmer said nothing in reply, but he felt that his 
patience was being sorely tried. 

As they lined up for the kick-off, 1t was apparent 
the Dulac captain had elected to receive. This time 
the man kicking off for Aksarben kicked it away over 
the goal line, making it a touchback, and the ball was 
brought back to the twenty yard line. As they lined 
up on the twenty yard line, waiting for the referee's 
whistle, it was evident that the entire Dulac team 
was over anxious to get going—they fairly shook with 
suppressed excitement. 

On the first play, Dulac made seven yards; on the 
next play ten yards; and as Elmer watched them 
march down the field he grasped the reason for the 
use of the long forward passes by the first quarterback, 





J 


FROM THE GRANDSTAND 123 


Edwards. On every play the man carrying the ball 
faked a forward pass and the line plunges and end 
runs following gained big yardage. The Aksarben 
second and third line defense lay away back looking 
for the forward passes which didn’t come. Down the 
field, past midfield, swung the Dulac team, off-tackle, 
through line, first left, then right, right down to the 
five yard line. 

Then a pistol shot was heard. It was the end of the 
quarter. 


CHAPTER XII 
DEFEAT 


HE teams exchanged goals, and this meant tha 
Dulac would now have the wind against hel 
Dulac was placed in the same relative position on th 
other five yard line, and the minute intermission be 
ing up the referee blew his whistle. Three differen 
plays Shorty Dunne chose, and the Dulac backs hurle 
themselves into the line three different times, but on 
yard on each play was the best they could get; it wa 
now fourth down on the two yard line. The nex 
play, which found Elmer with his heart in his mouth 
was a trick pass play. 

An instant later a Dulac halfback went sprintin: 
across the goal line, all by himself, and Shorty Dunn 
threw the ball right into his waiting arms—and h 
dropped it! There was a groan from the stands tha 
could have been heard for blocks. | 

“T never saw such a day for bad breaks,” said Elmey 
“Gosh, I never did see such bad luck!” } 

“Why didn’t he catch it?” asked Ruth. | 

“He tried to, but missed it,” said Estelle, seein, 
Elmer’s rising color. 

“Well,” said Elmer, “you can’t discourage tha 
bunch of men out there—they’ll come back yet.” 


With the wind with them, however, Aksarben chos, 
124 | 


DEFEAT | 125 


to play a kicking game the next quarter, and Shorty 
Dunne, trying to duplicate his first march, found that 
much of the enthusiasm of his offense had been spent. 
Nothing unusual happening the rest of the quarter, 
the half ended, with the score still seven to nothing in 
favor of Aksarben. In spite of his encouraging words 
to the girls, spoken as much to encourage himself as 
them, Elmer felt half desperate. 

Between halves one thousand Aksarben rooters in 
the stands snake-danced all over the gridiron to the 
intense chagrin of the thousands of Dulac supporters, 
who sat back stolidly hoping for the best in the next 
half. A group of Dulac students came out to put on 
a burlesque game between halves, but with the score 
seven to nothing against them, their heart wasn’t in 
it and the thing was a dismal failure. 

As it was the Aksarben captain’s choice the second 
half, they chose the wind, and when Elmer saw that 
Dulac had elected to receive, he turned to the girls 
with determined face. 

"The boys are going to take the ball and march 
straight for a touchdown,” he said. ‘Their ire is up 
and they won’t be stopped, you wait and see!”’ 

Shorty Dunne caught the kick-off on the goal line, 
and brought it back thirty yards behind perfect inter- 
ference. The first downs they made by slicing off 
tackle and line smashing—and then as the Aksarben 
second and third line defense crept up close, Shorty 
threw three or four passes, which carried the ball to 
the fifteen yard line. The Dulac stands were in an 
uproar. | 


126 | FOUR WINNERS 


It looked easy for Dulac now! Aksarben seemec 
unable to stop them. On the first play on the fifteer) 
yard line, the Dulac fullback went plunging into the 
line; but an instant later a huge red-jerseyed indi; 
vidual emerged with the ball and went sprinting dowr 
the field with no one near to stop him. He crossec, 
the goal line without anyone having come within ten 
yards of him. There was a stillness throughout all the 
stands, so still, one might even hear the heartbeats, 
Even the Aksarben stands could hardly grasp the situ: 
ation. And it wasn’t until they had place-kicked foi 
the other extra point that, with a loud howl, they gave 
vent to their exultation over what had happened. — 

“What happened?” aaltee Ruth. 

“Well,” said Elmer, “one of our backs thought he 
was carrying a loaf of bread home to mother, and that 
big Aksarben tackle just merely took it away from 
him and ran for a touchdown. Gosh, it makes you 
sick when you think of all the time Coach Brown has 
spent in teaching this fellow how to carry the ball: 
and then to have him go out there and practically 
give the game away like this!” 

~“T don’t believe Coach Brown can teach anything’ 
to anybody,” said some fellow in front of Elmer. 

“What a fine loyal rooter you are,” said Elmer. “J. 
bet you’ve placed about five dollars on the game and! 
because youre going to lose it you'll blame Coach’ 
Brown for it.” 

“Why, we should beat Aksarben by four touch- 
downs,” said the big burly fellow as he turned aroma 
and looked Elmer in the eye. 


{ 


DEFEAT 127 


“You can’t beat them with breaks of this kind,” 
Elmer retorted, “and I don’t see how you can blame a 
coach for the things that caused these two touch- 
downs.” 

That silenced the burly critic, and Elmer leaned 
back; but then he suddenly realized how embarrassing 
this must have been to the girls. 

“T’m awfully sorry I paid any attention to that fel- 
low,” he apologized in a low voice. 

“T don’t blame you at all,” said Estelle. “It’s just 
as my father says; there’s no one half so bright or 
half so brilliant as what he calls ‘the second guessers.’ ” 

“What is a second guesser?” suddenly cried out the 
irrepressible and ever-questioning Ruth. 

Elmer didn’t reply, though the critical gentleman 
in front again turned around and gave the three of 
them a belligerent look. 

With the score fourteen to nothing it was evident 
that the spirits of the entire crowd, almost all of 
whom were Dulac supporters, were very much de- 
pressed. On the next play or two, after another kick- 
off, there was practically no sound at all, and as the 
two teams exchanged kicks it looked as though it was 
all over but the shouting. At that instant the Dulac 
cheer leaders, three of them, got out in front of the 
stands. 

One of them, with the megaphone to his mouth, 
yelled sharply, “Dulac, in all its history has never 
quit—are we going to quit today?” And a resound- 
ing “No!” went reverbating across the gridiron, as 


128 x FOUR WINNERS 


each heart and lusty throat responded to the 1 inepirar 
tion of that challenging cry. 

That thunderous “No!” must have been heard | 
the team on the field; for as the fourth quarter started 
the Dulac boys began their third march down the‘ 
field to the goal line. Three and five yards to the play 
they averaged as they slashed, whirled and drove their 
way up the field. Once a forward pass, good for twen-' 
ty yards; then back to the running game! Now up 
to the fifteen yard line again; but here once more 
they were stopped for short gains three times in a row.’ 

“They'll forward pass on this play,’ said Elmer 
desperately, ‘another trick forward pass!” 

And sure enough, as the play developed it found 
Shorty Dunne ending up far back to one side with 
the ball in his possession. Suddenly he tossed it to: 
the fullback, who was hiding out by himself in one 
corner of the field. The silence in the grandstands 
was breathless. 

This time the ball was not dropped. This time ihe 
fullback walked across the goal line for Dulac’s first. 
score. Shorty Dunne kicked goal and the score was 
fourteen to seven. | 

“There’s nothing to it. I think we’re going to get 
two more!” Elmer cried in exultation. 

Aksarben chose to kick-off and they kicked far over 
the goal line for a touchback. As the teams were lin- 
ing up for the first play, the two girls and Elmer 
heard a lady down somewhere in the front ask her es- 
cort, “For goodness’ sake, whose ball is it now?” 

“Why, it’s Dulac’s ball,” said the man gruffly. 


DEFEAT 129 


“Oh, goody,” said the excited lady, “I just knew 
they would get it before the game was over!” 

Involuntarily Elmer turned and looked at Ruth. 

“Now don’t tell me I am as dumb as that!” Ruth 
protested with her eyes flashing. 

“As dumb as what?” said Elmer, innocently. 

“You heard all right! But never mind, I won't 
bother you any more.” 

“Why, yes, please,” said Elmer, “any time anything 
comes up that you want to ask about, please do so, 
Ruth.” 

With the same irrepressible rush which had marked 
their last march, Shorty Dunne took the dashing 
Dulac team straight up the field for first down after 
first down, until finally the ball rested on the one 
yard line, with fourth down goal to make. And as 
Elmer watched Shorty Dunne he could read his very 
thoughts. 

He thought of a line buck, and saw that huge Ak- 
sarben line now massed tight in front of Dulac. The 
ends were in tight. Aksarben had two backs playing 
up close, right behind the ends and a little bit on the 
inside, ready to reinforce whether on line plunges or 
end runs. Two men only lay back for the forward 
passes, as they had but a very short territory to 
cover—the end zone in which forward passes could be 
caught being only ten yards in depth. 

“T’d throw a pass, but Shorty, of course, can tell 
out there by sensing and feeling the situation a lot 
better than we can here,’ Elmer remarked. 

True enough, a forward pass it was, the same play 


130 | FOUR WINNERS 


that they had scored on previously; and again the 
Dulac fullback slipped over in a corner all by himself. 

But just as Shorty Dunne poised to throw the ball 
he slipped and fell, and before he could recover, two 
red-jerseyed men Had smothered him. 

Elmer groaned. ‘Ye gods, I don’t believe the Fates) 
want us to win this game!” 

In trying to maneuver for a better position to kick, 
Aksarben first fumbled and then on the next play, 
was thrown for a three yard loss. The next play 
found the kicker standing eight yards behind the goal 
line. 

“Time out,” cried the Aksarben quarterback, and 
yelling to the field judge, asked how much time was 
left. 

“Three minutes,’ came the answer. And then, as 
the Aksarben quarterback lined up to kick, he saw 
that Dulac had, besides their seven men on the line, 
the fullback who was up alongside the left tackle. It 
was evident that they were going to make a desperate 
attempt to block the kick—a blocked kick would tie 
the score. 

He went back and whispered something to the full- 
back and then lined up again and began calling out his 
numbers. As the ball was passed back to the fullback, 
several blue jerseys swarmed through, but the Aksar- 
ben fullback merely touched the ball to the ground 
and squatted on it. The referee’s whistle blew, and 
an instant later the ball was carried out to the thirty 
‘yard line. 


DEFEAT 131 


The score on the board now read, Aksarben four- 
teen, Dulac nine. 

“Can you beat that!” said Elmer. “Well, I guess 
it’s all over now. They played it safe, and it looks 
as though they are going to win.” 

“What was that” asked Estelle, “that counted two 
points?” 

“That was a safety,” said Elmer, “the ball being 
declared dead in Aksarben’s possession behind their 
own goal line—it would have been a touchback if 
the force came from a Dulac player. However, since 
the force which carried the ball across the goal line 
was from one of their own side, it is a safety. The 
center passed the ball across the goal line. He fur- 
nished the force.” 

“T don’t understand what you mean,” said Ruth, 
“but I think it’s a darn shame for Rip and the boys 
out there to have played so well, and then to be 
beaten.” 

“I think it’s darn poor sportsmanship,” said the 
big red-neck up in front, turning around to Elmer. 
“That sort of thing should be stopped.” 

“It’s perfectly all right according to the rules,” said 
Elmer, “and as long as the rules are that way, I don’t 
blame them for taking advantage of them.” 

“Well, Shorty Dunne should have hit the line for 
that fourth down anyhow,” said the other. 

“That’s all right for the Sunday morning field gen- 
eral,’ Elmer replied, “but Shorty Dunne had to make 
his decision out there right on the spot and quickly, 
and it wasn’t his fault that he slipped and fell.” 


132 | FOUR WINNERS 


This last remark apparently did not mollify the 
man, at least it silenced him. 

The Aksarben team now rushed the ball with great 
vigor for one first down; then they ran their plays off 
so slowly that they still had the ball on the third 
down when the gun went off announcing the end of 
the game. 

Elmer and the girls made their way slowly out 
through the exits, and over towards the gym, where 
they were to meet Rip. Scarcely any words were ex- 
changed between them. A little later Rip joined: 
them; and it was evident that he had been crying. , 
They looked at him in frank astonishment. No one, 
had ever seen Rip like that before. | 

“I had hoped that we could go out to dinner to- . 
gether,” he managed to say, “but the way I feel, I, 
think it would be best for me to go home and sleep . 
it off.” | 

“T think that’s a perfectly good suggestion for to- . 
night,” said Estelle, “but for tomorrow I'd say, let’s , 
all four have dinner at my home, and I won’t take. 
‘No’ from any of you. By that time Rip will have | 
gotten over the game of today, and we can have a 
jolly good time together.” 

“I may appear to be over it tomorrow en but I 
will never really get over today’s game,” said Rip. , 
“We all played our heads off, but things just wouldn’t , 
connect. I guess you understand.” 

Elmer at least understood—and Rip knew it. 


\ 


CHAPTER XIII 
EIGHTEEN MONTHS ELAPSE 


HE first part of December passed rapidly, and 

Elmer and Rip settled into their work rather 
briskly, and with little to break the routine. Elmer 
made an effort to qualify as a debater, but was not 
quite able to make it. The few days preceding the 
holidays were busy ones. All the professors were 
holding special quizzes so as to make sure none of the 
boys would take any more time off than that allotted 
by the faculty. The evening before they left for 
home, Rip and Elmer, along with Estelle, had dinner 
at Ruth’s house. The dinner was beautifully done, 
and Estelle was more lovely than ever, and yet EI- 
mer’s interest was dulled for some reason, and the 
boys went home early. The next day Elmer boarded 
the local train which took him back home to Spring- 
field. 

The return of the conquering hero is always an oc- 
casion for pomp, brass bands and revelry. The return 
of Elmer to Springfield produced not even a ripple of 
conversation anywhere, except in the Higgins home. 

“You are certainly looking fine, Elmer,” said Mrs. 
Higgins, as she embraced her boy. 


“Yes,” said Mr. Higgins, “and I just had a letter 
133 


134 | FOUR WINNERS 


from Professor Noon, who says your law work is very 
encouraging.” 

Elmer appreciated to the utmost the fine home he 
had, and during his two weeks Christmas visit he 
did everything he could to show his parents little 
attentions and courtesies. There was a_ special 
“Father and Son” meeting at the Kiwanis Club, and 
this he attended with his dad, not failing to notice 
the pride Mr. Higgins took when, on introducing EI- 
mer, he announced, “My son, Elmer Higgins, home 
for the holidays, from Dulac.” Abner Hughes came 
up a minute later, “My son, Hunk Hughes, home 
for the holidays, from State.” The sincere round 
of applause which followed showed that the citizens 
of Springfield were not blind to the fact that the 
great playing of Hunk Hughes at the state university 
was good publicity for their town. Coach Smith of 
State was also introduced, and gave a short talk in 
which he explained why he was a great coach. 

“The people like bunk,’ thought Elmer, “but I 
don’t believe they can stand it as a steady diet.” 

After the meeting was adjourned that noon, Smith 
came over and shook hands with Elmer. 

“T see you didn’t have very good luck in making 
the team at Dulac.” 

“T was doing pretty well,’ said Elmer, “but I had 
my knee hurt, so I didn’t get into the last games.” 

“That’s too bad,’ was Coach Smith’s rejoinder, 
made with a rather insinuating tone, as he walked 
away with some friends. 

To Elmer’s consternation, he overheard Smith re- 


EIGHTEEN MONTHS ELAPSE 135 


mark to these friends, “As a coach, I surely hear a lot 
of funny ones. This young Higgins boy just said he 
didn’t make the team at Dulac on account of a bad 
knee. Hah! he hasn’t got any bad knee; he’s suffer- 
ing from a goitre in his neck.” 

Elmer felt so furious that he hardly could restrain 
himself from following Smith and having it out with 
him face to face. However, he held his temper, and 
went over and joined Hunk. They went out together. 

Elmer and Hunk were inseparable friends, and 
spent most of their free time together during the two 
weeks’ vacation, and of course they discussed Smith. 

“T know he’s your coach,” said Elmer to Hunk, one 
day, “but by George, I can’t stand him! I know he 
has made several insulting remarks around town about 
me, but he’ll find out that I’m no quitter. The only 
reason I ever want to make the football team at Dulac, 
is to show him.” 

“Oh, he isn’t a bad fellow,” said Hunk, “but you 
have to understand him.” 

“T’m afraid you don’t understand him,” Elmer an- 
swered. ‘‘He’s pretty foxy. He takes all the credit 
for your great playing himself, and gives you none. 
He is the greatest ‘self-interest’ fellow I ever knew in 
my life.” 

“Now, I wouldn’t say that,’ said Hunk. ‘“Person- 
ally, I think he’s all right, but since you and I are 
good friends, let’s not discuss him any more.” 

Elmer admired Hunk for his loyalty, so it ended 
there. The name of Coach Smith didn’t come up 
again during the holidays. 


136. | FOUR WINNERS 


Dropping in at the corner drug store one evening, 
after a movie, Hunk and Elmer each had a soda. 
There was quite a crowd of town boys in the place. 
Included in this group was a chap who was known 
as the town josher. Walking up to their table, he re- 
marked, so that all the crowd in the place could hear, 
“Well, you'll be going back to school again soon, 
- Hunk, and I want you to know that the whole town 
is proud of you, and we are all watching you. We are 
all sorry that you hurt your knee, too, Higgins. I 
didn’t see you limping, and so didn’t know anything 
about your sore knee until Coach Smith told me about 
Lb. | 

Elmer neard a giggle run through the crowd, and so 
paid no attention to the innuendo in the remark. To 
his relief he saw that Hunk was totally unaware of 
what was referred to. However, to Elmer it was ap- 
parent that Coach Smith must have been doing quite 
a bit of joking around town in his own insinuating 
way about the injury, and he determined then and 
there that if he ever did anything in his life he would 
get into the game that Dulac would play with State 
the following fail. He was determined to avenge 
himself personally, and to humiliate the swaggering 
Smith. In fact, Elmer became so worked up over the 
situation, emotionally, that he found himself waking 
up at night, worrying about the game that fall. He 
confided to his mother all his hopes and fears, ambi- 
tions and humiliations; she was the only one who 
seemed to understand him. 

“Your father isn’t very keen about your playing 


EIGHTEEN MONTHS ELAPSE 137 


Elmer, but I understand how it is, and I certainly 
hope that you take good care of your knee, and that 
you can achieve everything that you have your heart 
set on.” 

“Well, the way it is now, mother, Coach Smith has 
me painted here in our home town in entirely false 
colors, and I think that I owe it to you and dad, as 
much as to myself, to show that we can hold our heads 
up with anybody.” 

It was with that set purpose that he returned to 
Dulac at the close of the Christmas holidays. 

But alas for determination! Before many months 
had passed, Elmer was doomed again to disappoint- 
ment. Running for a university street car one day 
his knee popped out, and he was laid up for several 
days. Still he was not discouraged. With the rou- 
tine work of the spring over, he obtained a job for 
the summer as a life guard at a bathing beach, feeling 
that this was not only the kind of work which would 
give him time during the summer for reflection, but, 
more than this, it was exactly the thing for his lame 
knee, for old Dad Moore had told him that the heat 
of the hot sun on the beach might heal up his in- 
jury. 

Then, once more, came a set-back. Returning to 
school after his uneventful but restful, and very 
beneficial summer, he had gone out for practice only 
one day when, out popped the bothersome cartilage 
again! This time he was laid up for three more days; 
and at the end of those days came the final verdict. 

“Young man,” the doctor told him, “your football 


138 3 FOUR WINNERS 


days are over, and I shall inform Coach Brown of this 
fact.”’ 

Something seemed, to crack in Elmer’s heart at 
these words. For a moment he was stunned. But on 
the instant he turned stoic. And stoic he remained, 
all through the following year, when at every game he 
was forced to stand on the sidelines; forced to sit in 
the grandstand, while the great State team was held to 
a tie by the light, fighting Dulac players. He read in 
the papers of the various alibis of Coach Smith, ex- 
plaining why the top-heavy favorite team of State 
had not won. He read in the papers how the Dulac 
team had once more beaten South Square. He de- 
voured the news of the surprising victory of a weak 
Aksarben team over Dulac. And all this, naturally, 
had its effect on him. At times he became extremely 
moody; he went mostly by himself. He saw very little 
of Estelle. Rip, of course, did all he could to cheer 
him up; but, though Elmer outwardly appeared to be 
quite settled and adjusted to things, within him were 
smouldering fires, which would not out. 

One day in May, Professor Noon sent for him to 
come to his study room. | 
“How have you been feeling, Elmer?” asked the 
kindly old professor, after he had asked Elmer to take 

a seat. 

“Just fine, professor; how have you been?” 

“Same as usual,’ said the old gentleman, settling 
back in his chair, apparently deep in thought. 

There was a long silence; then finally he drawled 
out, “I have been watching you for some months, 


EIGHTEEN MONTHS ELAPSE 139 


Elmer. Apparently there is something wrong; and I 
have come to certain conclusions.” 

Elmer wondered what he was in for. 

“Your law work has been falling off a little,’ Pro- 
fessor Noon went on, “not much, it is true, but falling 
off. Your enthusiasm seems to be gone—you seem 
moody,—gloomy. You don’t mix with the other boys; 
in fact, you have become a little cynical, ’m afraid. 
Now, I believe that your class work here is bringing 
you some knowledge of law; at least you are learning 
to concentrate. I do believe that you have a good 
mind and that you have patience, will power, ability 
to analyze. And I believe, too, that you have pretty 
fair control of yourself. 

“However, I have come to the conclusion that you 
are so set on making this football team that I am 
afraid if you don’t make it, you are liable to make a 
fizzle of life. I have never been particularly keen for 
athletics, but I do appreciate that under Coach Brown 
it has qualities for character development. He in- 
sists that you men play the game fairly and squarely. 
He doesn’t coach from the side lines, thereby robbing 
the boys of the opportunity to think for themselves. 
He insists that every man who represents Dulac shall 
be clean physically and morally, and must bear well 
the responsibility which rests on his shoulders. 

“T have never heard of any Dulac athlete reflecting 
discredit on the school. I have come to believe that 
the young men who play football do develop initiative, 
resourcefulness, ability to analyze, and to re-act 
quickly and accurately to this analysis; and I believe, 


140 ; FOUR WINNERS 


too, that football teaches boys their limitations and 
their possibilities. They develop respect for an hon- 
ored opponent. They develop a sense of fair play 
which in my opinion is one of the hardest things to in- 
culeate into any young man. “Last, and very im- 
portant, I do believe that the football man develops 
the will to win. I used to believe that this develop- 
ment of the will to win was a bad thing. However, 
we on the faculty are trying to develop young men 
for life. Life is competition. We are sending out 
lawyers, and these lawyers cannot be successful unless 
they win cases. We are sending out doctors from our 
medical schools and they cannot be successful unless 
they win—winning in their case means saving lives. 
We are sending out men to the business world, and 
they cannot be successful unless they win. They can- 
not be successful if they go into the bankruptcy 
court; and this is generally what happens when men 
lack the will to win. 

“So I have come to look upon athletics, properly 
controlled and supervised, as being a thing that will 
help to develop character. I think we are coming to 
the day when we are not going to penalize the success- 
ful man who wins in anything so long as he wins 
fairly. We are going to penalize the cheater, and I 
know that Coach Brown in Dulac University doesn’t 
tolerate a cheater for a moment.” 

Professor Noon paused a second. Elmer was taking 
in every word—for every word was a confirmation of 
his most earnest belief. 

“The function of the college,” the professor con- 


EIGHTEEN MONTHS ELAPSE 141 


tinued, “the undergraduate part of the school at least, 
‘is to help a young man find himself. Now, appar- 
ently, we have failed in your case, as you seem en- 
_tirely lost and out of touch with yourself. And now 
for the real point of my having you over here. 

| “I have a friend, Doctor George, in Chicago, who 
has performed some very remarkable operations on 
knees. Would you be willing to go up there as soon 
as school is out in June, and submit yourself to an 
operation by him?” é 

“Would I?” said Elmer; he sat bolt upright as he 
‘answered. “Gosh, I’d take a chance on anything! 
It seems too good to be true. I can hardly believe it.” 
_ He shook the old professor’s hand eagerly and grate- 
fully as he went that night. 

“How can I ever thank you for this interest you 
have taken in me, and for this great favor? I as- 
‘sure you, Professor Noon, I never shall forget it.” 
The second week in June, school being over, Elmer 
journeyed to Chicago, where he met the great surgeon, 
jand had the operation performed. His pal, Rip Rug- 
gles, had been elected captain of the team for the fol- 
a Bane year, and this fact only added to his determi- 
| nation to get back into football at any cost. 





| 


CHAPTER XIV 
SECRET PRACTICE. 


N the fourteenth day of September, that next 

fall, there was a long line of young men standing 
around one end of the gymnasium. It was about half 
past two in the afternoon, and the hot September sun 
was just beginning to lower itself into the horizon. 
Many of the young men in line were in their shirt 


sleeves on account of the heat. The green of the 


leaves was just beginning to turn to a browner shade, 
There was that in the air which warned that summer 
was over and that the crisp autumn days would soon 
be here. 

In the inner office of the gymnasium, somewhat 
removed from the room where four student managers 


were giving out football suits, checking lockers, and 
making notations, sat Coach Brown. Before him on 


the desk lay several pieces of paper on which were the 
names of all the candidates who were to be out the 
next day. There was a knock on the door. 

“Who is it?” inquired the coach. 

“Rip Ruggles.” 


“Come in.” Rip entered. “What’s on your mind 


this afternoon, Rip? Did you get your suit and locker 
all right?” 


“Yes, coach, I’m all fixed up and raring to go to- 


142 


| 


1 
, 


SECRET PRACTICE 143 


morrow, but these student managers won’t give Elmer 
‘Higgins a suit.” 

_ “No, I gave them orders to give suits only to those 
‘men on the list. We're a little shy on equipment, and 
Tm giving out only to those who I think have a 
chance to make the team. Higgins has that chronic 
knee of his, and there’s no use of his wasting any 
time over here.” | 

“Well, I have some good news for you, Coach. Hig- 
gins had his knee operated on in Chicago in June and 
‘it’s Just as good as ever now.” 

“How do you know?” Coach Brown sat forward. 

“Well, in the first place I saw it, and tried it. And 
yesterday afternoon we played three sets of tennis 
and that sudden stopping and fast starting didn’t 
bother it at all.” 

The coach remained deep in thought for several 
minutes; finally he said: “Well, now, that might be 
a solution. We lost Shorty Dunne a year ago, and last 
June Edwards graduated. I tell you what you do, 
Rip;—you go out and get Higgins and send him in 
to me here now, right away—and also get hold of 
Ward who handles our publicity.” 

Ten minutes later in together came the two young 
men. Elmer, brown as a nut, had an appearance of 
rugged suppleness that bespoke good condition. Ward 
was a typical student correspondent, nervous, high- 
strung, and bubbling over with enthusiasm. Coach 
Brown greeted them cordially; then suddenly, with- 
out a sign of warning, he hit Elmer a resounding 
whack on his right knee. It almost felled him. 





144 i FOUR WINNERS 


“Don’t be surprised, Ward; I was just wanting to 
assure myself about Higgins’ knee. I understand you 
had a little operation last June, Higgins?” 

“Yes, I did, Coach, and I was laid up only three 
weeks, and since then I’ve been down at the beach as 
a life guard. My knee is just as strong as it ever was, 
and I have never felt better in my life.” 

No emotion showed on the inscrutable face of the 
coach; he turned now to the newspaper correspondent. 

“The reason I sent for you, Ward, is to tell you to 
keep everything concerning Higgins absolutely under 
your hat. In our first two practice games against 
Alba and the Normal team, Higgins will not appear. 
There will be secret practice every night, beginning 
with the first practice tomorrow. This will continue 
up until the Aksarben game. Aksarben has beaten 
us two years in a row, and Higgins here will be my 
trump card. So don’t forget—regardless of what you 
see in the daily scrimmages, or practices, there must 
be no mention of the name Higgins. ) 

“Higgins, here is a note for Wherrett, the student 
manager; he’ll give you full equipment. Il see more 
of you later.” 

An hour later Rip and Elmer were winding their , 
way up and down the ravines along the shore of the 
historic creek. 

“Gee, it surely seems good to get back to the old » 
place—I hate to think of ever leaving it,” said Rip. 

“Yes, we do a lot of crabbing while we’re here, but . 
I appreciate more what Professor Noon said now.” 

“What was that?” 


SECRET PRACTICE 145 


“He said that the four years a fellow spends at col- 
lege are the best years of his life. I wouldn’t have 
said so last spring,” continued Elmer, “but the way I 
feel now, it seems I have a new hold on life.” 

“You could have knocked me over with a pin when 
you told me about your knee,” said Rip. “Why the 
deuce didn’t you write and tell me about it?” 

“T didn’t tell anybody except my mother. I was 
optimistic, but I wanted to be sure before I said 
anything.” 

“Shucks, you could have told me.” 

“Well, I wanted to surprise you.” 

“You certainly did surprise me, all right. I guess 
Coach Brown is mighty tickled, too, though he doesn’t 
say so. He was in a pretty tight hole, as his other 
candidates for quarterback don’t amount to very 
much. This last year’s Freshman quarterback, Ber- 
lin, is being touted quite a bit in the papers, but all I 
ever saw him do is drop kick. He certainly does that 
with a vengeance, but that let’s him out.” 

They got to a high point on the bank of the creek 
and stood for a few minutes overlooking the beautiful 
country below them. 

“Let’s cut straight across the fields for the four-mile 
road,” said Rip, “and we can gather some grapes at 
the school farm on our way back.” 

“That’s a go,” said Elmer, and a minute later they 
began trudging their way leisurely across the fields 
towards the university farm. 

“What do you think will be the hard game this 


146 | FOUR WINNERS 


fall?” said Rip, after they had walked for some dis- 
tance. , 

“Well, as far as I am concerned, the one game I am 
living for all fall is the game with State on Thanks- 
giving Day.” 

Rip, who knew all the details regarding Elmer and 
Coach Smith, laughed. “I guess you’d like it if Coach 
Smith would come out and put on a suit and play 
himself, wouldn’t you?” 

“T don’t care if we lose every other game on the 
schedule. If we could beat Coach Smith forty to 
nothing it would be the greatest day of my life, and 
as far as I am concerned I’d consider all my efforts at 
football well worthwhile.” 

“T thought Hunk Hughes and you were pretty 
good friends.” | 

“We are good friends—next to you he is the best 
pal Ihave. But that has nothing to do with this game — 
of football.” 

“State, I understand,’ Rip commented, “has the | 
finest material it has had in years. They have three 
other backs just as good as Hunk, and that’s the rea- ' 
son I know the State game is going to be a battle.” - 

“Smith doesn’t know much football,’ was Elmer’s : 
answer, “and all he thinks about anyway is Smith, | 
Smith, Smith. I think he is a detriment to the game, | 
and I think it is men like him who cause some of our | 
faculty men to lift their eyebrows whenever you men- : 
tion the word football.” | 

“Well, I’m with you with every ounce of energy | 
and pep I can work up and I know you’ll have nine ' 





SECRET PRACTICE 147 


other teammates who will be feeling just the same, 
and you know it, old boy.” 

“Yes, but you forget, Rip—I haven’t made the 
team yet,” said Elmer; “though if anybody makes 
that position regular at quarterback,’ he added, “it 
will be over my dead body.” 

They filled their pockets with grapes at the farm, 
-eating a bunch or two as they continued their stroll, 
but saving most of them to be eaten in the room just 
before bedtime. 

They arrived back at the Fellowship Club for their 
evening meal as usual, and found there the cheerful, 
serious crowd which had always given the Fellowship 
Club a distinctive atmosphere. Professor Noon, with 
several others of the faculty, was present. The con- 
versation at dinner drifted from the League of Na- 
tions to the Prohibition Law, and finally to the one 
inevitable subject of football. Jipper Gite, who was 
taking some post graduate work, did most of the talk- 
ing when the last subject came up. 

“The team looks all right to me, boys. If Coach 
Brown can only dig up a quarterback. With Credon 
and Miller at the halfbacks, and Jones at fullback, we 
have three of the greatest backs in the country. The 
line looks very strong and I believe that Ruggles at 
guard, and Kerr at end, ought to have a good chance 
for All-American— I trust you will pardon me for 
getting personal, Rip,” said Jipper. 

“Oh, I’m good, I admit it—you remember I played 
a great game for Aksarben last fall,’ replied Rip, 
which retort brought smiles to the faces of the club 


148 | FOUR WINNERS 


members, for they all knew full well that if there was 
any man who played football the year before against 
Aksarben, it was Rip Ruggles. 

“The first big test will be against Aksarben,” said 
one of the crowd. 

“South Square is not so good this year—graduation 
raised havoc with their team,” remarked another. 

“As far as I’m concerned,” Elmer put in here, “the 
team we've got to beat is State. They have the 
finest material, but that’s one game we are going to 
win.” 

“T was rather hoping,’ remarked Professor Noon, 
“that when we resumed playing State, that our rela- 
tions would be more pleasant. I understand, Mr. Rug- 
gles, that there was a lot of muckerism in that game. 
last year.” 

“There was,” said Rip, “but they’ve one boy who is 
a gentleman, and that’s Hunk Hughes, their half- 
back.” 

Elmer shot Rip a grateful look of thanks. Shortly 
afterward the conversation drifted to the new Com- 
merce Library, which had been donated by some 
wealthy alumnus. 

The next day, the opening day of practice, there 
were some seventy-five men trying out for Varsity. 
A like number were equipped to try out for the Fresh- 
man team. After an hour and a half’s work on the 
simplest fundamentals, the coach let them all get a 
drink from the pump, and lie under a big tree in the 
corner of the field for fifteen minutes. At the end of 








SECRET PRACTICE 149 


the intermission, Coach Brown came over and began 
talking. | 
“Boys, there are certain things which I want you 


to bear in mind. First of all, I want not a single man 


to mention to anyone, not even his own roommate, 
the fact that Higgins is running signals with the 
Varsity. And secondly, I don’t want any man to 
mention to anyone anything about our plays and 


signals. Our first big game is with Aksarben, and if 


anybody asks you what our chances are, in that game, 
tell them you don’t know. And you don’t. I am 
purposely going to make you look bad, because I won’t 
give the quarterbacks any plays to use, but between 
ourselves we are going to have a good team,—a team 


_that in the Aksarben game is going to surprise every- 


one. 

“IT want every man out here to feel that he has a 
chance to make that team; whether or not he does 
depends entirely upon himself. We have the men 
here, we have the spirit, we have everything, in fact, 
to start a season on. But we have an awful lot of 
hard work ahead of us, a lot of grief, a lot of monot- 
ony. I don’t want any man to stay out unless he is 
absolutely serious, and intends to give the best that’s 
in him. 

“If you get tired and worried, don’t get discouraged 
—the test between now and the Aksarben game is 
going to be severe and only real men will come 
through. This game of football is very much like 
warfare, and it’s up to you men to see that no infor- 
mation goes out that would be of any help to our 


150 , FOUR WINNERS 


opponents. We must spring a surprise in the way of 
attack, and this can only be done if each one of us 
keeps his own counsel.” 

The men fell to practice shortly afterwards with a 
vim and vigor, and a tearing up of the turf, which 
showed that the team as a whole was a unit in deter- 
mination and concentration. Whether or not they 
had the competitive soul, that fire of nervous energy 
so necessary to succeed in football, only time would 
tell. 

Ten days after the opening practice, the coach held 
his opening scrimmage of the season. Jones, Miller, 
and Credon took turns at some brilliant individual 
running with the ball, though teamwork and co- 
hesiveness was still lacking. 

“Tt certainly is a God-send that your knee is all 
right,” said Rip that night. ‘These other quarter- 
backs are certainly just a lot of number callers. This 
fellow, Berlin, hasn’t got a brain in his head, and all 
he seems to want to do is to call his own number, to 
run or pass or kick—and yet the coach didn’t say a 
word to him.” 

“Coach Brown will never say anything to the quar- | 
terbacks in front of the rest of the team. But I ex- 
pect that on Monday, at the special quarterbacks’ 
meeting, ie will be shown all our mistakes in today’s 
scrimmage.” 

“T understand the students are somewhat up in 
arms on account of the secret practice,” said Credon, 
who had been up with them since earlier in the eve- 
ning. 


SECRET PRACTICE 151 


“Aw, shucks,’ Rip answered, “Coach Brown will 
explain all that at the first mass meeting, and they 
will forget all about it as soon as we lick Aksarben. 
He may hold open practice the day before the Normal 
-game to give the cheer leaders a chance to rehearse 
‘their cheers, and everybody will be satisfied. 

“T’m afraid the coach is overdoing the gloom stories 
that are going out, however,” continued Rip. “I un- 
derstand some of the alumni have been writing in, and 
they seem to be pretty well worked up and worried.” 

“That’s a good way to have them—we'll give them 
the surprise of their lives on October seventeenth.” 

The next week was a series of feverish scrimmages, 
mostly on offensive play, getting the team ready for 
the Normal game. The reports on the Normal team 
were meagre, but there was nothing to indicate that it 
had anything more than its usual team. During the 
week a dozen plays were rehearsed, dummy scrim- 
mage was practiced by the hour, and the first two 
teams scrimmaged a full hour with the plays on 
Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday. The entire 
squad heaved a sigh of relief when Coach Brown or- 
dered a little light workout on punting and receiving 
kicks for Friday afternoon. Jones was punting sixty 
yards, with good height, and even Elmer was getting 
the ball out around fifty yards most of the time. 
Coach Brown worked quite a bit developing the 
wedge formation on the kickoff, and also the fake 
wedge. 

That evening Coach Brown called a meeting of the 





152 ) FOUR WINNERS 


quarterbacks for six-thirty in his office in the gym- 
nasium. 

“T don’t even want you to put on a suit tomorrow, 
Higgins. I want you to sit on the bench and draw 
a chart of the game and make a written report 
to me by Monday, of what you would have done in 
the various situations, had you been up against a 
- team as strong as Aksarben. 

“Mull and Berlin, I want you to go in there and 
work just three plays, twenty-eight, the inside tackle 
play; ninety-two, the wide end run; and fifty-six, the 
little short forward pass. I want Credon to throw 
that out to the flat zone to Miller. Credon is not a 
very good passer, and this kind of a pass will make 
that more apparent. Neither of you two men can 
forward pass, and I want the both of you to try to 
throw a couple of passes to the ends on punt forma- 
tion, without any signal. I want all the visiting scouts 
to see the fact that neither of you two quarterbacks 
can pass. 

“Higgins, here, is passing better every day, and by 
the Aksarben game I want the Aksarben team to 
feel that our forward pass attack is below the ordi- 
nary. Berlin, when you are in there running the team, 
I want you to try a place kick, whenever you get in- 
side the thirty yard line. I want to build you up all 
year as a place kicker.” : 

The coach then went on and gave a list of routine 
instructions, after which he dismissed the boys. 

“T wish I could run the team the way you do,” said 


SECRET PRACTICE 153 


Berlin to Elmer, as they walked back toward the dor- 
mitories. 

“The same here,” said Mull. “There are so many 
things a quarterback has to think of that I don’t know 
where to start or where to finish.” 

“You just take the things as Coach Brown hands 
them to you,’ Elmer answered, “absorb them and re- 
tain them, and keep building up and you'll get along 
all right. I have had practically a year’s experience, 
which you haven’t had, and which Coach Brown 
seems to consider as being of some importance. How- 
ever, I don’t want you fellows to feel that I have any 
edge on you. You fellows, so far, are going just as 
good as I am, and the thing for us to do is to go out 
there and be good friends, and work together for Coach 
Brown, and let him pick whoever he thinks is the best 
man.” 

Both Mull and Berlin thought this was fine on-the 
part of Higgins, a senior. This marked the beginning 
of a strong friendship between the three of them. 
There were no petty jealousies among them at any 
time during the season. 

The next day, Saturday, proved wet and dismal. 
There was a steady downpour all day, but despite this 
there was a big crowd out to see the team in its open- 
ing game. The three weeks of secret scrimmage had 
whetted the appetites of all the fans to a fine edge, 
and there was much speculation in the stands as to who 
would be playing quarterback. Coach Brown started 
Berlin with the second team, and after about fifteen 
minutes of play, consisting almost entirely of kicking, 


154 | FOUR WINNERS 


the Normal quarterback fumbled and the ball was re- 
covered by the Dulac left end. | 

“Now is Berlin’s chance to see what he can do,” 
said Elmer, who was sitting in civilian clothes next to 
Rip. The first play failed to gain, and on the second 
play, Berlin fumbled, but recovered. 

“He certainly looks all up in the air out there,” said 
Rip. 

“He'll make this place kick, though,” said Elmer, as 
the Dulac team dropped back on the thirty yard line 
for a place kick formation. The next instant Berlin 
stepped forward and meeting the ball squarely sent it. 
sailing between the uprights, making the score three 
to nothing. | 

The Normal team chose to kick off, but as the Dulac 
team was lining up to receive, eleven new blue- 
jerseyed players arrived on the scene. Elmer sat back 
on the bench, and to him it looked as though it would 
be just a matter of form as to whether or not the Var- 
sity would score two touchdowns or four touchdowns 
the next quarter. 

Down the field, ten to twelve yards at a clip, came 
the Varsity; and then, just as it seemed as though the 
score was a certainty, Mull forward passed right into 
the arms of a Normal player. 

“That was a boner,” said Elmer to himself. 

The Normal team lined up and kicked the ball fifty 
yards up the field on the first play. Again the Varsity 
started up the field, but this time found the going 
much harder. Encouraged by their success thus far, — 
the Normal team was playing away over their heads. 


SECRET PRACTICE 155 


l was now Dulac’s turn to kick. Held for no gain on 
‘the third down, Jones sent a spiral fifty yards back 
hip the gridiron. The Varsity found themselves un- 
‘able to make any consistent gains at all for the rest 
jof the quarter, and the half ended with the ball in 
‘their possession in midfield, Berlin’s place kick still 
constituting the lone score. 

Nobody seemed worried between halves, as the 
|Normal team had not shown any offense, and there 
lwere no signs that they had anybody with any offen- 
lsive ability. — 

“T think we'll play it safe this second half,” said 
Coach Brown to the team. “You go back in there 
with the same team, Mull, this third quarter, and I 
want Jones to kick continually on third down. Play 
‘it absolutely safe. Whatever you do, Mull, don’t 
throw any more of those short passes this half. 

_ “This Normal team is fighting like the deuce, and 
will probably come back harder than ever this second 
half. This certainly is just the kind of practice we 
‘want and a lot of you fellows who think you are pretty 
good better get a different point of view on the game 
this second half. This Normal team isn’t running out 
| of the park just because you fellows go out there with 
eleven Dulac headgears. There is only one way to 
make this game safe this second half and that is to go 
‘in there and play as though you meant it. Our ends, 
particularly, are pitiful. You have been lying around 
‘on the ground on your stomachs so much that you. 
\moust feel like a lot of bathing beauties out on the 
‘beach being photographed for the rotogravure section. 





156 ) FOUR WINNERS 


“The tackles and guards have got absolutely no 
charge, and all our backs seem to be thinking of is 
making a long run for a touchdown. Long runs for 
touchdowns are all right. However, the safest way 
to insure a touchdown is to keep biting off the four 
and six yard gains.” 

At the start of the second half Dulac received and 
marched the ball right down to the ten yard line, 
when for some unaccountable reason Mull forward 
passed again and the ball was grounded in the end 
zone for a touchback. The Normal team put the ball 
in play on the twenty yard line, and punted on first 
down. 

“Berlin, you go in there,” Coach Brown ordered. 

Out onto the field went the sprinting Berlin, to report 
to the referee. Mull came over to the sidelines, rather 
crestfallen; but Coach Brown said nothing. Elmer 
went over and sat down by Mull. 

“What made you forward pass again, right down 
there when your running attack was going so well?” 

“Miller suggested it,” said Mull. 

“Don’t pay any attention to any suggestions from 
anybody,” said Elmer. “You're the quarterback; 
you're responsible for all offensive plays, and you’re 
the one that’s going to be criticized now for the mis- 
takes that have been made.” 

“T know it,” said Mull. “It certainly won’t happen. 
again.” 

In the meanwhile down the field the Varsity was. 
again flying, five to eight yards at a clip. Berlin was | 
using himself quite frequently and when they reached 


SECRET PRACTICE 157 


the ten yard line, Berlin, on a quarterback sneak play, 
fumbled the ball. The ball was recovered by the Nor- 
mal team, and their cool headed punter, on their first 
play, sent the ball back past midfield, with a clean 
high soaring punt. The Varsity became discouraged, 
and there was no more ground gained the rest of the 
third quarter. 

‘In fact, the game was a succession of punts until 
well along in the fourth quarter, when, standing on 
his own twenty-five yard line, Berlin dropped a punt 
and the wide awake Normal end pounced on it. like a 
flash. | 

“We certainly aren’t looking very good today,” said 
Elmer. “If the Normal team has any kind of a place 
kicker now, they’ll tie the score.” 

Walking up to Coach Brown, who sat at the other 
end of the bench, Elmer inquired, “Should I go in and 
put a suit on? I can get dressed in five minutes.” 

“No,” replied the coach, ‘“‘we’ll stick to our original 
plans, regardless of what happens. The Normal team 
has no offense, and I’m not worried about stopping 
them.” 

“T know, but how about a place kick?” asked Elmer. 

The coach said nothing, but it was plain that he was 
worried. 

Three different plays the Normal team tried, but 
they were held for no gain in each instance by the 
Dulac line, which was now charging in with a ven- 
geance. The Normal team took time out, after which 
they lined up in place kick formation. They were 
directly in front of the goal posts; the quarterback 


158 | FOUR WINNERS 


kneeled down to receive the ball from the center on 
about the thirty-two yard line, and it was plain that if 
the Normal team had a good kicker it would be a tie 
score. 

“Block that kick,” yelled the Dulac cheering sec- 
tion. | 

However, as soon as the Normal quarterback started 
calling his numbers, the Dulac cheering section quieted, 
due to the tenseness of the situation, and also for the 
sake of courtesy. 

Back from the center shot the ball, and like a. flash 
the quarterback held it on the ground. An instant 
later the fullback had met the ball squarely, and it 
was soaring toward the goal post. However, it 
swerved away and missed by more than a yard. 

“His foot described a lateral arc,” said Elmer, 
he would have made it.” 

“A miss is as good as a mile,” replied the coach 
laconically. “If Berlin gets away a good punt the 
game is over.” 

Standing on his own ten yard line, the ball having 
been brought into the twenty yard line from the re- 
sulting touchback, Berlin kicked the ball sixty yards, 
and two minutes later the game was over. ) 


“or 


CHAPTER XV 


“INTERFERENCE” 





HAT evening after supper Rip announced that he 

had made an engagement for Elmer and him- 
self to go to Ruth’s home that evening. Yes, Estelle 
Wilson would be there, and they would either go to 
the movies, or they would enjoy themselves at home 
singing, for with Ruth at the piano, this was one of 
their favorite pastimes. 

The boys arrived at Ruth’s shortly after eight 
o'clock, and found that the girls had already made 
some fudge and were in a merry mood. Rip suggested 
going to the movies, but Ruth pleaded that she was 
too tired, having been out to the game that afternoon. 
So they stood around the piano and sang for a short 
while to Ruth’s accompaniment. 

“T think you were rather selfish,” said Ruth to 
Elmer, later on in the evening, “not to take us out 
to the games.” 

“Coach Brown has a special reason for having me 
on the bench,” Elmer answered, blushing, and with 
evident embarrassment. 

“Special reason?” 

“But I can’t tell you anything about it until after 
the Aksarben game,” he hastened to add, still more 
embarrassed. 





159 


160 FOUR WINNERS 


“Are you sure,” asked Hstelle, smilingly, “that you 
aren’t using that as an excuse not to go with us?” 

“T know Elmer is bashful,” Rip put in, “but I can 
assure you that he is on the bench for special reasons, 
and we are only sorry we cannot say anything about 
it until after the Aksarben game.” 

“This sounds terribly intriguing,” said Estelle, “but 
I can’t possibly imagine what it can all be about.” 

“IT do wish that Elmer had a good knee, though,” 
said Ruth, “because he certainly could play better 
than those quarterbacks this afternoon. My dad said 
that was the worst game he has seen Dulac play in 
twelve years. He also said that Aksarben will beat 
you by four touchdowns, unless there is a decided im- 
provement somewhere along the line.” 

“There'll be an improvement, all right,” said Rip; 
and then he managed to change the subject. “Let me 
hear you play that rhapsody again, Ruth, won’t you, 
please? I think it’s wonderful.” 

Shortly afterwards Estelle left for home, Elmer, of 
course, her escort. Rip went with them a short way, 
going on to the university at the corner where Elmer 
and Estelle turned for her home. Bidding good night 
at the front door, Elmer finally mustered up courage 
to say, “I really’d like to take you and Ruth to the 
game next Saturday, if I can arrange it with the coach. 
Maybe I won’t have to be on the bench for this game.” 

“T’m very sorry,” Estelle answered, rather casually, 
“but I already have an engagement for the game. 
However, I’d be pleased to accompany you to the 
Aksarben game, if you like.” 


“INTERFERENCE” 161 


Elmer felt himself growing red with embarrassment. 

“I’m sorry,” he stammered, “but you see I won’t 
be able to take you to the Aksarben game.” Of 
course, he couldn’t explain; he felt horribly foolish! 
“But,” he added, “I can arrange with a personal friend 
of mine to go with you and Ruth.” 

“Please don’t bother,’ was Estelle’s answer, and 
Elmer felt its coolness. ‘“‘Good-night.” He felt dis- 
missed. 

Practice the next week consisted of a series of scrim- 
mages in which the Dulac Varsity, led by Elmer at 
quarterback, concentrated entirely on their offense. 

“Our defense,’ remarked Coach Brown, Thursday 
afternoon, “can take care of itself. Defense is largely 
a matter of individual courage, aggressiveness and 
technique. Offense is the difficult thing to develop, 
because it is entirely a matter of teamwork. The 
finesse of timing, judgment, and team coordination are 
very difficult to attain. I am far from satisfied with 
what has been shown so far this week. Aksarben will 
have all her scouts here so we'll have to go out and 
beat Alba Saturday with the same three plays we used 
against Normal last Saturday.” 

The game the following Saturday against Alba was 
in many respects a repetition of the Normal game. 
Once more Elmer sat on the sidelines and saw the 
Varsity, with Mull at quarterback, march for a touch- 
down in the first five minutes. Against the reserves 
in the second quarter, however, the Alba team pre- 
sented an impenetrable defense, and the usual punt- 
ing duel resulted. Just before the whistle blew for 


162 | FOUR WINNERS 


. the half, Dulac fumbled and an Alba player, picking. 
up the ball, ran seventy yards for a touchdown. They 
kicked goal, a thing which the Dulac Varsity had 
failed to do, and the score at the end of the half stood 
seven to six in favor of Alba. 

In the third quarter Alba rose to real heights and 
continued to hold Dulac with apparent ease. It was 
not until the fourth quarter, when, goaded into a 
frenzy of desperation by apparent defeat the Var- 
sity, now led by Berlin at quarterback, marched sixty 
yards down the field to the five yard line. They were 
still using only the three plays which they had used 
in the Normal game. Here, however, Alba again put 
up a stone wall defense. On the fourth down Berlin 
went back into punt formation and standing on the 
fifteen yard line place kicked for three points. Alba 
kicked off again, Dulac was starting another march 
down the field, when the game ended. 

Elmer, getting up from the bench, found that he 
was tired—even more tired than he would have been 
had he played. Dulac had barely won nine to seven; 
it was a close call. Walking back toward the gym- 
nasium, he came alongside Coach Brown, and here 
noticed for the first time that the coach looked tired 
and careworn. 7 

“That was pretty hard on my nerves,” said Elmer 
to the coach. “It’s a lot harder to stay on the sidelines 
than it is to be in the game, by far. Weren’t you 
worried at all?” 

“Yes,” Coach Brown admitted. “TI had just got to 
the point where I was going to send out a substitute 


“INTERFERENCE” 163 — 


with instructions to have the team open up the full - 
offense, when suddenly they got going without it. I’m 
glad we didn’t have to use our offense. The Aksarben 
scouts are now completely in doubt as to our style of 
attack and the system of offense.” 

“But Aksarben has an easy game also, so we won’t 
know much about their offense, will we?” 

“No,” Brown replied, “but it won’t matter much. 
Our plan next Saturday will be to get hold of the ball 
and to keep possession of it all afternoon. Aksarben 
won’t be able to beat us as long as we have the ball and 
are scoring. Unless I’m mistaken we’ll do very little 
punting next Saturday.” 

Elmer waited for Rip to get dressed, after which 
they made their way together toward the Fellowship 
Club for dinner. 

“Well, there’s no date tonight for us, old boy,” said 
Rip. “I called up this noon and Ruth said that she 
and Estelle had other plans.” 

“What difference does that make?” But Elmer, in 
his heart, knew that it did make a difference. “We can 
get in a few rubbers of bridge over at the club,” he 
went on, “and by that time it’ll be bed for me.” 

“Oh, I suppose so,” Rip agreed. “But as a pair of 
ladies’ men we are a couple of clowns. Did you see 
the two sheiks that were with the girls this after- 
noon?” 

NO? 

“Well,” said Rip, “they’re two of the prettiest boys 
in school. One of them has a nice blond mustache, 
and the other fellow wears a big raccoon coat.” 


164 ) FOUR WINNERS 


“Well, what about it? You aren’t jealous, are you?” 

“No, not exactly; but if I’m going to be turned out 
I'd like to have it done by men, and not by a couple 
of flossy boys.” 

“Well, if they’re the kind of fellows the girls prefer, 
I don’t see where it concerns us,” said Elmer. 

“Maybe it shouldn’t,” replied Rip; and then he con- 
tinued with some determination, “I'll have an en- 
gagement with Ruth for next Saturday night if I 
have to shave a certain blond mustache, or buy a rac- 
coon coat myself.” 

As Elmer lay in bed that evening running over vari- 
ous things in his mind, for the first time he felt more 
and more upset about the day’s happenings. 

“But what right have I to get sore?” he asked him- 
self. “I have no right to dictate in any way with 
whom Estelle shall attend the game, or with whom 
she should associate. We are just good friends, noth- 
ing more.” 

And yet his pride was stirred, and his thoughts, as 
he lay awake, were not on football. 

The next Monday noon the blackboard drill was 
called off, to the surprise of the entire squad. When 
they went to look for Rip to find out why it had been 
called off, they were informed that Rip and Coach 
Brown had gone to attend some special meeting. 
Neither one of them appeared on the campus all that 
afternoon. The workout that afternoon was con- 
ducted by one of the assistant coaches, the two lead- 
ing assisting coaches also being missing. And this on 


“INTERFERENCE” 165 


the Monday preceding the Aksarben game! What 
was up? 

Elmer tried to analyze the situation, but all he 
could do was to speculate and only hazily at that. 
Instead of the active organized practice, with one 
single end in mind, the work that afternoon was 
entirely informal. When it was over, about a quarter 
to six, Elmer dressed and hurried to the Fellowship 
Club. Sure enough, there was Rip. Ata glance Elmer 
saw that something had happened. This was a differ- 
ent Rip than the one he knew. The usual carefree at- 
titude of his roommate was gone, the happy-go-lucky 
air was missing, and so was the irresistible smile. The 
glint in the eye, the set of the jaw, and the quivering 
of the mouth showed that from the crucible of some 
emotional reaction there had emerged a new by- 
product, a new compound, which Elmer didn’t under- 
stand. 

“What’s the dope, Rip?” 

“Sssh, I'll tell you after dinner.” 

“Why the intrigue and mystery?” 

“Now, don’t be a sap,” said Rip. “Let’s keep quiet 
until after dinner, when we can get into a quiet 
corner, and then I’ll give you all the dope—and be- 
lieve me, you'll hear something that you will want to 
digest slowly.” 

Dinner over, Rip and Elmer found two chairs in a 
corner of the writing room, and making sure that no 
one was near, they sat down for their talk. 

“Well, what’s it all about?” asked Elmer. “I’ve 


166 | FOUR WINNERS 


been trying to dope it out in my own mind, but not 
having any facts, I’m absolutely at sea.” 

“Well, it’s a long story,” Rip began, “but I’ll make 
it as short as possible. This noon there was a meet- 
ing of the Advisory Committee on Football, and I, as 
captain, and Coach Brown, were invited in. Only two 
of the faculty men were present. The rest of the men 
- present were alumni. I could see as soon as I went in 
that the spokesman for the alumni was Windy Bill 
Biggs,—you know, the millionaire fish magnate from 
the Pacific Coast. You remember he was a great player 
here in his time, and he’s now the chairman of the 
Alumni Advisory Board.” 

“What is this Alumni Advisory Committee, any- 
way?” 

“T don’t know their exact duties,’ Rip answered, 
“but somehow or other they must have a lot of author- 
ity, judging from the way the faculty kowtows to 
them. Windy Bill didn’t waste any time, but came 
right out with the announcement that the alumni were 
entirely dissatisfied with the coaching, and entirely 
dissatisfied with the showing of the team the first two 
games this year. He was empowered, he said, to come 
down with the rest of the alumni committee, either to 
make a change in coaches, or to put some assistant 
coaches in from among the old timers. These as- 
sistant coaches were really to run the team, to get it 
in shape so that they could win the big games of the 
year.” 

“And what did Coach Brown say to this?” asked 
Elmer, his eyes wide with surprise. | 


“INTERFERENCE” 167 


“Nothing—he never said a word; just sat there, 

quiet, and apparently disinterested. But you can bet 
your life I didn’t keep quiet. I asked Windy Bill 
what he knew about the situation, and he told me to 
keep quiet and not to be so impertinent, as under- 

graduates were to be seen and not heard. That made 
me sore, and I came back at him. I told him that if 
he followed his own advice they would have to change 
his nickname. Oh, he was wild—threatened to put me 
out of the room, and all that sort of stuff; but I re- 
minded him that I was captain of the team, and that 
we were eleven men who would stick together as a 
unit. 

“We let him talk for a long time and they had all 
kinds of plans for bringing back some of the old timers. 
Finally, when they just about had their plans ready, 
I began talking again, and told them that before they 
decided on this plan of theirs, that they might have the 
courtesy to listen to Coach Brown. Coach Brown, I 
told them, had a plan he had been working on all fall, 
and since his profession was that of a football coach, 
maybe he might have a few remarks on the game that 
would be of interest, even to these experts present. 

“Windy Bill gave me a glare at this, but he did 
have the decency to ask Coach Brown to give his 
views. It was after four o’clock by that time, and the 
coach got up and began talking very quietly. He told 
them first of all that he didn’t know much about the 
fish business, and so he wasn’t in a very good position 
to give advice along that line to Windy Bill. I tell 
you I was surprised and happy at that, because I 


168 : FOUR WINNERS 


thought the coach was down, the way he’d been sit-' 
ting there all afternoon. You can bet your life all: 
of them started pricking up their ears after that first 
remark of his. | 

“The coach then went on to explain that he had 
been coaching at Dulac ten years and during that 
time had lost just five games, a record which was sur- 
passed by only one or two in the coaching profession. 
He went on and told the crowd that many times in 
the past few years Dulac had won games when they 
were not supposed to have a chance. He told them 
that nobody, except himself and the team, knew how 
it was done. He explained the two defeats in suc- 
cession by Aksarben, by giving full credit to Aksarben, 
asking whether or not he was to blame because men 
fumbled, or didn’t hold on to forward passes. Then 
he explained about your knee, Elmer, and all about 
his strategy in preparing for this game for next Satur- 
day against Aksarben. He said he appreciated the 
interest taken by the alumni, but just the same he 
wound up by saying that he thought it would have 
been better if the alumni committee had asked him 
about his plans first, and not waited until this late 
hour. In fact, he said, he realized that the only reason 
he was called upon to explain was because Captain 
Ruggles had suggested it. 

“There was a lot of pow-wowing after that, but you 
can bet they listened to me when I told them that the 
team was with Coach Brown to a man, and they were 
just as loyal to their school as they were to their 
coach. I told them that if they didn’t let Coach 


“INTERFERENCE” 169 


Brown alone for this Aksarben game I wouldn’t be 
responsible for anything that might happen. 

“So they finally adjourned, and postponed action 
‘until after the Aksarben game. That’s the story. El- 
imer, what do you think we ought to do?” 
| “T would do this,” said Elmer, “unknown to the 
coach, or the alumni, or anybody else, I’d call a meet- 
ling of the fellows for tomorrow night, and tell them 
just exactly the facts as they are. I think if we can 
‘do this the team will go into that game against Ak- 
‘sarben so fighting mad nothing can stop them.” 

“All right! It’s a good idea. I'll have the dozen 
fellows meet over in our room tomorrow night. We 
can squeeze them in some way. I don’t think we'd 
better bring any more fellows than a dozen, or the 
‘meeting might become public property.” 

The practice the next afternoon was as different 
from the practice of the day before as one could im- 
agine. The coach was energy personified. He was all 
over the field at the same time. During offensive 
scrimmage every detail which went wrong was recti- 
fied. They spent an hour and a half polishing up the 
forward pass plays, which were to be used against Ak- 
sarben. Elmer was the passer in all these plays, and 
as he threw the ball right into the arms of the receiver 
again and again his confidence in himself grew and 
mounted to a pitch of enthusiasm. 

That evening about seven-thirty some twelve foot- 
ball men huddled together in Elmer’s room, with Rip 
as master of ceremonies. Rip explained the facts as 
he had explained them to Elmer. 











170 3 FOUR WINNERS 


“Now, here’s the point, boys,” he exclaimed. “The 
alumni have no business butting in at this time of 
the season. They’ll ruin the whole fall if they do, be- 
cause they don’t know what they’re talking about. 
Secondly, we all know that Coach Brown is as good a 
man as the school can get, and it’s up to us to see that 
the school retains him. Thirdly, all the football we 
know we have learned from Coach Brown, and we all 
know we have a great team coming along. It would 
be absolutely unfair for someone else to come in here 
and take credit for this work. 

“However, the big thing we want to bear in mind 
is this—we all know Coach Brown’s plans and we be- 
lieve in them. We're going to go out and win every 
game this fall. So, let’s all shake hands on beating 
Aksarben decisively next Saturday, so that Coach 
Brown and the team can go right on with the cam- 
paign this season, unhampered by a lot of busy-bodies. 
If they want to change coaches between seasons that 
may be all right, but it’s altogether wrong to be butting 
in at this time of the year.” 

The boys rallied to Rip’s talk whole-heartedly, and 
swore to fight to the last ditch the coming Saturday 
afternoon. | 

“Remember,” said Rip, just before they left, “this is 
absolutely secret, and no one must ever hear of it. I 
just thought we could represent old Dulac with more 
intensity and fervor next Saturday, knowing the facts 
as they are.” 

The next day at noon Rip told Elmer that he had ar- 
ranged with Ruth and Estelle to attend the autumn 


“INTERFERENCE” 171 


| dance to be given by one of the university clubs the 
‘evening after the Aksarben game. Elmer concealed 
| his interest as much ds he could. 

“T don’t know who these two fellows are that are 
trotting after them,” said Rip, “but I call them Dan 
|Dormitory and Joe College. Ruth was rather peeved 
lover the phone when I called them these names, but 
‘believe me they give me a big laugh. They’re taking 
ithe girls to the game Saturday. I had quite a time 
/arranging for the dance engagement. However, I 
‘dropped a couple of hints that aroused their curiosity, 
jabout the game Saturday, to such an extent that they 
decided to go to the dance with us and not with the 
itwo anecdotes. Believe me, I know these women! 
Just rouse their curiosity, and you have them where 
you want them.” 

Elmer couldn’t help but laugh at Rip’s “women wis- 
dom,” and his candor in talking about it. 

When the practice Thursday evening was over, the 
men were called in together by the coach for a short 
talk, after which they were all dismissed. Every man 
was in good shape physically and even Coach Brown 
was surprised at the spirit which the team was show- 
ing. 

“T’ve been coaching for many a year,” he remarked 

to Rip, “but I’ve never seen a team so ready for a 
game as this one.” 
, “You'll get the surprise of your life during the game, 
200,” said Rip enthusiastically. ‘This is one game I 
wouldn’t worry about if I were you—it’s already in 
the bag.” 


| 








172 | FOUR WINNERS 


The coach smiled. “The time to win the game is 
Saturday afternoon.” 

The regular meeting of the quarterbacks was held 
Thursday night in the coach’s office, but by this time 
the number of quarterbacks had been cut down to 
three. Mull and Berlin had been showing up much 
better in practice, but even these two ambitious young 
gentlemen had to admit that it was a different team en- 
tirely with Elmer running it. 

But in spite of all these high spirits, it was evident 
to Elmer, as he sat in the office, that the coach was 
worried keenly. He tried to cover it up, and Elmer 
admired him for that; but the telltale evidence was 
plain in the deep lines of his face and the intensity 
of his voice. 

“Now, in this game Saturday,” said the coach be- 
ginning his talk to the quarterbacks, “we've got to get 
the jump early. Let’s get Aksarben on the run and 
keep them there. We don’t know much about their 
style of play this year, but we do know that they have 
a veteran team. Lord, their right halfback, is a terror 
on offense. He’s the man who has beaten us the last 
two years. 

“We do know, however, that he is absolutely help- 
less against the forward pass. We will start the first 
team against them—and Higgins, I want you to for- 
ward pass over Lord’s head on the first play, and to 
continue passing over him whenever you think the 
situation is ripe. Don’t forward pass on third down or 
on second down. In this game, we're going to for- 
ward pass on the first down, thus violating all the rules 








AY 


THE COACH SHOWS ’EM THE Ww 


“INTERFERENCE” 173 


of strategy that are generally accepted in the game. 
After we have scored twice, and I have every confi- 
dence we will, then I believe that our running attack 
will go, as the Aksarben team will be entirely demoral- 
ized and will be running around panicky, trying to 
stop the forward passes. These, however, from that 
point on will be withheld. There is only one thing I 
want you to bear in mind on defense. 

“Besides being a great ball carrier, Lord is also a 
great receiver of forward passes. Why he is so vul- 
nerable against forward passes when he is playing de- 
fense is beyond me, but getting back to my main 
point, Lord is a great receiver of forward passes. He 
is the man whoruns deep. Therefore it is the quarter- 
back on defense—because he is the man playing farth- 
est back—who will have to cover him on all forward 
passes. Don’t let him get past you. This would be 
fatal. We'll continue to play an offensive game of 
football all through and if any of the men tire out at 
all, Rip will let me know so that we can keep putting 
fresh men in there all the time. We must go at full 
speed every minute of the sixty.” 

Friday afternoon the team merely played dummy 
defense against the Freshmen, who used the Aksarben 
formations as they interpreted them. The team then 
practiced returning the kick-off a few times, after 
which they went back to the gymnasium. The work- 
out was extremely light, just enough being done to put 
on the finishing touches that were needed. All through 
this Elmer was surprised to find that instead of being 
nervous he was filled with a deep determination and a 


174 FOUR WINNERS 


confidence in himself which he had never before ex- 
perienced. In fact the whole team seemed to feel the 
same way. Rip was the only exception. His duties of 
captainship were beginning to act a little on his nerves, 
but his powers of leadership were still at their best. 


CHAPTER XVI 
THE COMEBACK 


FTER dinner on the memorable Friday evening 
before the Aksarben game the entire squad of 
thirty-five men were loaded into busses and taken out 
to the Country Club. Elmer found the Country Club 
a delightful place at this time of the year, not like 
a club at all, but like a huge country home; for there 
was no one there but the caretaker. A bright fire was 
burning in the big open grate, so as soon as the boys 
had put their luggage away in their rooms they came 
down to the main hall to sit around and enjoy the com- 
fort and satisfaction which comes from a log fire; all 
the more so since it was already quite cool out doors 
in the evening. Spending their time at cards, the vic- 
trola, and in good natured talk around the fire, they 
put in a happy and restful evening. The trainer, 
Daddy Moore, was a great believer in having boys 
keep their minds off the game, and he was around in 
this group and that, busying himself telling stories and 
in general keeping them in good humor. 
Everyone was up for breakfast at seven-thirty. It 
was an ideal day. 
“Our forward passing game ought to go great,” said 
Rip at the breakfast table. “Our main forte is speed, 


but T would hate to think of playing that giant Aksar- 
175 


176 | FOUR WINNERS 


ben team in the mud,—but then, why worry about 
mud?—we’'ll run them ragged today because they : 
haven’t anybody fast enough to catch Miller or Cre-_ 
don.” | 

As the boys took a walk around the golf course after 
breakfast, Dad Moore smiled to himself. It was evi- | 
dent that every man had the color, and the suppleness - 
of muscle, that denotes perfect physical condition. It_ 
was also evident to Dad’s experienced eye that the. 
team as a unit was absolutely right mentally, in ex- 
actly the state of mind men should be in before a game. 
There was no playfulness in their mood this morning. 
That was all right the night before; but now they were 
serious and recollected. There was a grim silence as 
the groups walked along. 

“There will be no lunch today,” said the trainer, Dad 
Moore. “The whole crowd of you are so nervous and 
keyed up that I am afraid to feed you anything.” _ 

So the team waited at the Country Club longer than 
had been expected. They left in busses so as to reach 
the university gymnasium about one o’clock. Arrived 
there, they began dressing immediately. The half- 
backs and ends had the thigh guards ‘taped directly on 
to the thigh. The halfbacks and ends also had their 
ankles taped. The linemen had their wrists taped. 
Dad Moore rubbed one of the linemen’s legs with win- 
tergreen. This lineman had been suffering from a 
charley-horse, but had recovered. The wintergreen 
was added here merely to keep the leg warm, and to 
prevent it from becoming tight again and hence more 
susceptible to another charley-horse. : 


THE COMEBACK 177 


At one-thirty, the team was all dressed and all three 
centers sat nervously playing, each with a football. 
There was no one in the dressing room, but the team, 
Dad Moore, the student managers and the coach. The 
assistant coaches were all away scouting. Just at this 
moment, in through the door came a delegation of 
men, at the head of which was Windy Bill Biggs. 
Coach Brown greeted them with a smile and shook 
hands all around. 

“T’m glad to see you here today, gentlemen. Boys,” 
and he addressed the team, “these men here are all 
alumni who have come a long way to see Dulac play 
Aksarben today.” 

Windy Bill pulled the coach to one side. ‘Do you 
mind if a couple of us talk to the team before the 
game?” 

Elmer overheard this with astonishment, but he was 
not surprised at Coach Brown’s response. ‘Nobody 
talks to the team except myself,” said the coach. “You 
men mean well, but you don’t understand.” 

“Why, man,” protested Windy Bill, “Lou Harmon- 
ica, the greatest jury lawyer in America, is with us, 
and he could send that team out there in a state of 
mind where they would fight their weight in wildcats.” 

“T’m sorry,” said the coach firmly, “but I have made 
it a policy never to allow anyone to talk to the team 
except myself.” 

“Well, it’s your own funeral, not mine,’ and Windy 
Bill turned and made his way out the door followed by 
the rest of the alumni group. 

At a quarter to two the coach called for silence, and 


178 FOUR WINNERS 


then he surprised the team by making the shortest talk 
on record. 

“T want a silence of one minute,” he began, ‘“‘abso- 
lute silence, while every man here prepares himself for 
an hour of the hardest playing he has ever done in 
his life.” | 

The silence that followed was indeed profound; it 
lasted not one minute but several; the place was tense 
with it. Finally the coach spoke. 

“Captain Ruggles, do you and your ten men feel that 
you are going out there to represent Dulac with credit 
to Dulac, to yourself, and to your fathers and 
mothers?” : 

“Yes,” they yelled in chorus. 

“All right, then,” said the coach. “Let’s go.” 

As Elmer stood out on the field, catching now and 
then one of the long twisting spirals which Jones sent 
down the field, he thought, between kicks, how much 
more effective had been that silence and those few 
words of Coach Brown’s, than the lengthy tirades de- 
livered by his old high school coach, Smith, or such 
“oratorical eloquence” as Windy Bill and his friends 
had wished to indulge in. Everything that could be 
done, had been done during the week, and if it hadn’t 
been done, it was too late, fifteen minutes before the 
game, to do it. The whole point was, the Dulac team — 
was mentally fit for a real contest, and the coach had — 
said nothing to upset this status. A barrage of ora- 
torical emotionalism by Lou Harmonica, or any of — 
the other alumni, would have ruined them. Elmer ap- | 
preciated for the first time the trials and tribulations — 


THE COMEBACK 7 179 


to which a college coach is subject, and still more he 
appreciated the fact that the Dulac coach was pre-em- 
inently a man of sound common sense. 

Rip won the toss and chose to take the wind. The 
Aksarben captain elected to kick off. The game was 
beginning. 

The eleven men all shook hands before they went out, 
and as they lined up to receive, Elmer for the first time 
took a look around the field. Every available seat was 
taken and both stands were a riot of color, noise and 
music. He heard faintly the “Fight, fight, fight!’? com- 
ing as a chant from the Dulac sections, while from the 
Aksarben sections, even more faintly, he heard the 
words of their state song, “We’re from Aksarben.” He 
was surprised to find how cool and collected he was 
and how his every faculty was at his command. That 
full year’s experience, two years previous, had done its 
fruitful work. 

“Are you ready, Captain Ruggles?” called the ref- 
eree. “Are you ready, Captain Bay?” 

The whistle sounded and an instant later Lord, the 
giant Aksarben halfback, had sent the ball soaring far 
over the goal line. The great game was begun. 

Jones went back and fell on the bail for a touch- 
back. The ball was brought out to the twenty yard 
line. Instead of calling for the customary punt forma- 
tion, Elmer called for “Close formation A, right, 82, 
98, 46, 15, hip,” and the backfield shifted to the right. | 
Elmer faked the ball to Jones who went through all 
the motions of a line plunge—but Jones didn’t have 
the ball. Elmer still held it. Running straight back, 


180 | FOUR WINNERS 


with his back to the other team, Elmer suddenly 
whirled and threw the ball diagonally over his left 
shoulder; forty yards across the field the ball traveled, 
just far enough and just high enough so that Kerr, the 
left end, running full speed down the field, was able 
to reach it. 

He bobbled it for an instant, but finally tucked it 
away; then, on and on, straight down the field, he 
continued, not being tackled until, just as he crossed 
the goal line, the Aksarben safety man lunged for him, 
Elmer went jogging down the field with the rest of the 
team and found the referee carrying the ball out to 
the five yard line. 

“Place kick formation,” called Elmer, “89, 49, 56, 
15;” and instantly the ball was snapped back to Elmer 
_ who, resting on his left knee, placed it straight up and 
down on the ground alongside of him, holding it in 
place with the index finger of his right hand. A frac- 
tion of a second later, Jones sent the ball sailing be- 
tween the goal posts for the extra point. The score 
was seven to nothing. The crowd had not had time to 
realize what had happened. 

As the team which has a touchdown scored against 
it has the choice, the Aksarben captain chose to re- 
ceive. Jones kicked off for Dulac, sending the ball high 
in the air to the Aksarben fullback. The Aksarben 
fullback was extremely slow in getting started and 
was tackled on his own fifteen yard line. Aksarben, 
finding itself unable to gain on the first two plays, 
kicked on the third down to midfield. Elmer was back 
there to receive the punt, but when he saw both Ak- 


THE COMEBACK 181 


sarben ends right on top of him, ready to tackle him, 
he signalled for a fair catch. 

“That’s the old head work!” said Credon, running 
up. 

An instant later, they lined up. “This is a Dulac 
year,” yelled Rip. ‘Come on, boys, let’s show them 
what we’re made of.” 

“84 38, 29, 52,” called Elmer. This time the back- 
field shifted to the left, Elmer got the ball from the 
center, and went through all the motions, facial and 
otherwise, that would indicate his intention to again 
throw a pass to Kerr; although Kerr, this time, was 
well covered by the fleet Lord. Elmer faked the pass 
to Kerr, stopped it with his left hand, and threw the 
ball short, right into the arms of the right end who 
had cut across into the territory vacated by Lord. 
Ten yards he travelled, after catching the ball, before 
he was tackled by another Aksarben back. Aksarben 
took time out. It was apparent that they were pan- 
icky; quite demoralized for the time being. 

The two minutes allowed for time out being up, both 
teams lined up again. It was first down ten for Dulac. 
Again Elmer called a series of numbers that shifted his 
players to the right. Faking as though he had the ball, 
Elmer was running wide and an instant later, Jones, 
the fullback, went crashing through center for twelve 
yards. The Aksarben defensive center had pulled out, 
leaving his position undefended. It was first down on 
Aksarben’s twenty yard line. 

On the next play the team again shifted to the right 
and again Elmer went streaking out to the right. This 


182 7 FOUR WINNERS 


time nobody watched him, or followed him; and in an-. 
other instant, Credon, who had received the ball from, 
the center, placed a beautiful pass into Elmer’s arms, 
and in two steps he was across the goal line for the sec- 
ond touchdown. | 

Jones again kicked goal, making the score fourteen 
to nothing. The Aksarben team again chose to re- 
ceive, but being deep in their own territory, were un- 
able to gain. Dulac scored two more touchdowns that. 
half, though there were no more forward passes thrown. 
The Aksarben team had gone to pieces completely; 
they seemed hopelessly outclassed from then on; they 
had never, from the very beginning, been in a position 
where they could exert their full offensive strength. 
Elmer had outguessed them at every turn, and the 
third and fourth touchdowns were the result of beau- 
tiful parades down the field. 

The second half was a repetition of the first, except 
that Aksarben fought harder and with more cohesion. 
They stopped Dulac twice when touchdowns appeared 
imminent, and in the fourth quarter launched a beau- 
tiful offensive, headed by the giant Lord, which yielded 
them one touchdown. When the gun went off at the 
end of the game the score stood thirty-four to seven 
in favor of Dulac. The Aksarben team had fought 
doggedly and tenaciously, but except for the last five 
or six minutes they lacked that exhilaration and en- 
thusiasm which is so essential to success. 

An instant later the crowd swept out on the field 
and it was with some difficulty that Elmer made his 
way out, and over to the gymnasium. To his sur- 


THE COMEBACK 183 


prise he felt no particular emotional joy in the vic- 
tory; just a keen sense of satisfaction. Everyone 
seemed to be happy, but happy with restraint. 

~ “South Square and Kingston haven’t got much this 
year,” announced Rip to the boys in the shower baths, 
“but I don’t think we have much of a chance to win 
from that State team.” 

‘We'll win from State,” said Elmer, “or they’ll have 
to come out and carry my dead body off the field.” 

A student manager just then came in hunting for 
Rip and Elmer. ‘Coach Brown wants you and Hig- 
gins to come into his office.” | 

Entering the coach’s office a minute later with Rip, 
Elmer saw that the room was filled with the same 
group of alumni that had been in the dressing room 
before the game. They were noisy, filled with en- 
thusiasm, singing college songs, and slapping one an- 
other and Coach Brown on the back, though the coach, 
to Elmer’s eye, was plainly bored. He gave Rip and 
Elmer a sly, good-humored look as they came in. 

“T congratulate you, boys!” exclaimed Windy Bill, 
as he spied Elmer and Rip entering. “The greatest 
game of football ever played by any team anywhere! 
Ruggles, as a guard, you are magnificent, and Higgins, 
your strategy was superb, immense. And we have the 
best little coach there is in the business. Anybody 
that ever criticizes Coach Brown will have to reckon 
with me. The way he planned that game today ought 
to satisfy anybody. It was the greatest piece of strate- 
gy I ever saw.” 

When Elmer and Rip, after a minute or two of 





184 | FOUR WINNERS 


this, turned and went out, the last sound they heard 
was Windy Bill’s voice still rolling out its noisy praises 
of coach and team. 
As they stood on the steps of the gym, Rip shook 
Elmer by the hand. “Boy, you have sure come back!” 
“Thanks a lot, Rip,” said Elmer, “but I won’t be 
satisfied till we’ve beaten State.” 


CHAPTER XVII 


RIVALS 





LMER was late in arriving at the hotel where the 
dance was being held. The rush at the tailor’s 
ha delayed the delivery of his tuxedo to such an ex- 
tent that Rip had to go ahead in a cab, and take the 
girls to the ballroom. Elmer was to join them there 
las soon as he could. He was still further delayed by 
the fact that it took him over a half hour to tie his 
dress tie—Rip had always previously performed this 
ritual. However, at last he had his studs properly ad- 
justed and the tie smoothed out so that it satisfied his 
critical eye. 
The dance was already in full swing when Elmer 
arrived. It was a formal party, and a very expensive 
orchestra had been imported from Chicago. Checking 
his hat and overcoat, Elmer had no more than entered 
the ballroom when he was surrounded by at least a 
dozen persons, all wishing to congratulate him on the 
game of the afternoon. Visibly embarrassed by these 
attentions, Elmer could do nothing except stand there 
and discuss the various points of the game with the 
crowd, and answer divers questions; and all the time 
he grew more and more nervously anxious to join his 


own group. Finally he spied Rip and the two girls 
185 








186 | FOUR WINNERS 


standing together at one side. He excused himself 
from the crowd, and immediately went over to them, 

“T thought you were going to give us the ritz,” Ruth 
laughed. ‘Now that you’re so famous, I didn’t know 
whether you’d care to come over and associate with 
common people.” | 

“Were you waiting here long? I’m awfully sorry,” 
Elmer answered. “Really, I broke away just as soon 
as I could.” 

“Tt was certainly thrilling this afternoon,” said Es- 
telle. “I was never so surprised in my life as when I 
saw you out there playing quarterback.” 

“Yes,” continued Ruth, “you might at least have 
given us a hint or something,—we wouldn’t have told 
anybody.” 

“Well, we gave our word to the coach,” said Rip, 
“and I know you wouldn’t want us to break our word, 
would you?” 

“T think it was wonderful,” said Estelle, “and all 
the more wonderful because it was such a surprise.” 

At that instant the orchestra struck up one of the 
prevalent “blues” and both boys immediately took out. 
their programs, to see what arrangements they had 
made for exchanging dances. 

“Rip,” said Ruth, “we’ve got to save a few dances 
for the two young men who took us to the game this. 
afternoon.” | 

“Oh, you mean Joe College and Dan Dormitory— 
are they here tonight?” | 

“Now, Rip, I think it’s perfectly outrageous for you’ 
to try to ridicule those two boys. They were kind 


RIVALS 187 


mough to take us to the game this afternoon, and 
hey’re very nice boys, too.” 

“Of course, they’re nice!” laughed Rip, “and, of 
sourse, we'll save these men all the dances which you 
hink they may want.” But there was mischief in his 
syes as he spoke. 

“T believe this is our dance, Estelle,’ interpolated 
¢Imer, and excusing himself, he and Estelle swung off 
cross the floor. 

There was a gay crowd at the dance, and an atmos- 
shere of brightness and relaxation that made Elmer 
‘eel that he was on top of the world as he glided 
round the floor with his charming partner. That 
iumber finished, the four of them were again standing 
ogether in the same corner. 

Suddenly, “Here come the two anecdotes,” whis- 
nered Rip to Elmer, as two young men sauntered 
ucross the floor towards them. “No funny stuff, now,” 
aid Elmer, “remember, try to be a gentleman.” 

_ The two young men were effusive in their greetings 
0 the girls, and on being introduced to Rip and Elmer 
vere painfully polite. Their real names proved to be 
‘ilbert Magg and Maurice Day. 

“A ripping game you played this afternoon,” ven- 
ured Filbert. 

~“Vhank you,” said Rip, “very glad you enjoyed it.” 
“Quite interesting,” volunteered Maurice. “It’s 
ather seldom that I enthuse, but I must say this af- 
ernoon was an exception.” 

_ “Very nice of you to say so,” replied Elmer. 

_ “Are you gentlemen stagging it tonight?” asked Rip. 


| 
| 








188 | FOUR WINNERS 


“Yes,” replied Filbert, “and we're having a jolly 
time.” 

“Well, here are our programs,” volunteered Rip, tak- 
ing his and Elmer’s and proffering them to the boys. 
“Fill in what you wish, as I know it is the ladies’ 
pleasure.” 

Elmer noticed the flicker of a smile creeping around 
the corner of Rip’s mouth, and he was so afraid that 
at any time Rip might iss something” in his usual 
unexpected style, that he decided it might be best 
to break up the conversation until later on. He turned 
to Messrs. Filbert and Maurice. 

“When the intermission comes won’t the two of you 
join us, while we go out on the mezzanine?” he asked. 

“We should be very happy to.” The answers came 
so nearly like a chorus that Rip nearly laughed. Any- 
way, the “twins” were rid of for a while. 

Elmer danced the next dance with Ruth. 

“T believe I’m going to like your two friends,” said 
Elmer, trying to draw Ruth on. | 

“T think they’re perfectly all right,” returned Ruth. 
“T know Rip doesn’t like them at all, and I felt sure’ 
he would say something that would hurt their feel- 
ings.” i 

“Hurt their feelings? Oh, no,—why should he do 
that?” 

But Ruth merely gave him a sly look, and said not: 
ing. 

The evening was passing very pleasantly and swiftly.: 
In no time at all, it seemed, came the intermission.’ 
The ‘six of them moved out to the mezzanine, and 


RIVALS 189 


seated at a large table were presently served with ices; 
and then the fun began for Rip, and Elmer, saying 
nothing but listening to the conversation of the two 
“staggers.” 

“How do you like your new Stutz roadster?” said 
Filbert to Maurice. 

“Oh, I don’t know; I haven’t been able to get more 
than sixty-five out of it so far,” replied that airy young 
gentleman. “You know,” hesexplained, turning to the 
girls, “father promised me a fast car for going on that 
frumpy yacht trip this summer—always such a bore 
to me—and I was a little bit disappointed when he 
gave me the Stutz.” 

“T smashed up the family Cunningham last summer, 
up in the woods, and the family won’t let me have a 
car now for a whole year,” Maurice complained. 

The girls looked at Rip, and Elmer looked at Rip, 
but that young gentleman displayed an inscrutable 
countenance; his manner indicated only the most 
polite interest. Maurice made some more remarks to 
the effect that he would have to join the folks down in 
Florida during the Christmas holidays. Filbert’s re- 
marks were something to the effect that possibly he 
might not return to school the second half as he might 
have to go with his people to Europe. But no matter 
what was said Elmer and Rip still remained scrupu- 
lously attentive. And as the game played on, the girls 
grew plainly more and more ill at ease. They tried, 
time and again, unsuccessfully, to swerve the conver- 
sation over to football. 

Shortly after the intermission, Elmer and Rip took 


190 | FOUR WINNERS 


the girls home; their families did not permit them to 
keep the usual midnight-and-after hours of dancing 
parties. 

“Well, I suppose Maurice will take you to the dance 
next Saturday night,” said Elmer to Estelle, as they 
drove along in the taxi. 

“He may,” Estelle answered, “but really I’m afraid 
he isn’t the gentleman I thought he was.” 

“Why, I think he’s a perfect gentleman,” said Elmer. 

“A gentleman doesn’t make other people envious by 
telling them about all the good things he has in life.” 

“Under that definition your friend is still a gentle- 
man,” replied Elmer, “because I can assure you that 
he didn’t arouse any trace of envy so far as I am con- 
cerned.” 

“Well, I was disappointed,” Estelle admitted frankly. 
“He was so nice at the game.” 

“Tsn’t he still nice—nicer than I am?” asked Elmer, 
as the cab stopped in front of her door. 

But Estelle only laughed, and called out ‘“Good- 
night” as she ran up the walk to her door. 

The following week end the Varsity, twenty-four 
strong, went down and beat the ancient and honorable 
foe, South Square, fourteen to nothing. Elmer played 
almost the entire game at quarterback, though he did 
no spectacular playing. The game was really won by 
the spectacular off-tackle dashes of Credon and Miller. 
South Square’s attack was powerful, and they were 
able to gain quite a bit of ground in the middle of the 
field. However, Dulac stopped them whenever they 
became dangerous. 


RIVALS 191 


The team arrived home the Monday morning after 
the game. That afternoon they began active prepara- 
tions for the Kingston game at home, the following 
Saturday. Kingston, however, was reported to be 
weak, and Coach Brown instructed the quarterbacks 
to try to win the game without throwing a single 
forward pass. However, there was no let up in the 
forward pass practice during the week. Perfection in 
the execution of the pass was the one thing above all 
others aimed at daily, the coach having in mind the 
State game, the last game of the year, as a climax to 
the season. The coach, in fact, continually kept drum- 
ming into the ears of the boys the State game, while 
he apparently paid but little attention to the game the 
coming Saturday; and this, of course, kept Elmer keyed 
to pitch, for to him the State game, and victory over 
Smith, was the be-all and end-all of the season. 

After dinner at the Fellowship Club Friday evening, 
Rip motioned Elmer to a chair alongside him. 

“Something has happened to our friends, Joe and 
Dan,” said Rip. ‘The girls are going to the game to- 
morrow with Ruth’s mother. Something has hap- ’ 
pened, but I haven’t heard what it is. We’re both in- 
vited up to Ruth’s house tomorrow night for dinner. 
We may and we may not hear what has happened to 
our two friends. I’m inclined to believe that they 
talked themselves out of the league.” 

“T had a letter from home today,” said Elmer, chang- 
mg the subject, “and my folks are going to be down 
for the State game.” 

“Yes,” said Elmer, “and the folks are going. Mother 


192 | FOUR WINNERS 


writes that father is all het up over football, and has 
his chest out so you can’t touch him with a ten-foot 
pole.” 

“Tt certainly makes a difference, when his boy is 
playing quarterback,” laughed Rip. 

“Oh, keep quiet,” said Elmer, “but I sure am glad 
to see the old gentleman changing around. He cer- 
tainly was strong the other way for a long time.” 

“My father was just the opposite,” said Rip. “T 
know he would have been keenly disappointed if I 
hadn’t made the team. In fact, in high school, I don’t 
believe I would have gone out at all, but for his en- 
couragement.” 

They were interrupted then by Professor Noon, who 
strode over and challenged Elmer to a game of chess. 
This was a favorite diversion of the old professor, and 
he was more than a match for anyone in the club. 

“How is it you’re not going out to the Country Club 
tonight?” he asked Elmer during the course of their 
game. 

“Tt’s a little late in the year,” said Elmer, “and be- 
sides I don’t believe the coach is taking the game to- 
morrow quite as seriously as he might. We're quietly 
spending most of our time preparing for the State 
game.” ) 

“We have a surprisingly good team this year,” said. 
Professor Noon, “but I don’t believe we have much. 
chance against State. They seem to be running rough: 
shod over all their opponents, and with very little diff- 
culty.” | 


RIVALS 193 


Elmer’s eyes flashed and his jaw set, but he said 
nothing further. 

The game against Kingston proved a great deal more 
dificult than was expected. Kingston displayed its 
traditional aggressiveness which for a time completely 
neutralized the speed and cunning of the Dulac team. 
However, in the third quarter the Dulac team marched 
fifty yards to the eighteen yard line, from which point 
Miller scored on one of his eel-like runs. The final 
score, seven to nothing, was rather disappointing to 
the Dulac adherents, who packed the stands, but the 
coaches and the players themselves were entirely sat- 
isfied. 

“It may not look so good,” said Elmer to Rip in the 
dressing room after the game, “but, anyway, we didn’t 
have to show anything. We have at least a dozen 
plays which the State scouts have never seen, and if 
they work as well in the game as they have in prac- 
tice, we'll give Coach Smith the surprise of his life.” 

“Coach Smith,” said Rip, winking to his roommate, 
“who is he? Is he the fellow who coaches State?” 

“Don’t try to be funny,” said Elmer, “the State 
pame is one thing that I’m serious about.” 

The dinner at Ruth’s home that night was the good 
old-fashioned family kind. Mrs. Fife was a motherly 
soul who took such pride and satisfaction in prepar- 
ing a real meal, that both Elmer and Rip had a hard 
time to keep from eating more than was proper. 

“I don’t know much about this game of football,” 
said Mrs. Fife, “but I sure do enjoy watching the cheer 
leader.” 


194 | FOUR WINNERS 


“Oh, mother, don’t you think that Rip and Elmer 
played a wonderful game?” 

“Oh, my yes,” said her mother. “They were just 
grand, but I did enjoy watching that cheer leader turn 
somersaults. All his antics are so interesting.” 

Rip and Elmer enjoyed that. 

“Don’t you think, Mrs. Fife, that you could get away 
and come down and see the State game?” 

“Oh, my, no,” she replied, ‘““my husband would think 
there was something wrong with my mind!” 

“Where were your friends this afternoon?” asked 
Rip later that evening, during a pause in the music. 
“T don’t think it was very gallant of them to let you 
girls go to the game with your mother alone.” 

Elmer noticed a little rising color in Estelle’s cheeks, 
but she ventured no reply. 

“What a great pair of heroes they’d be in case our 
country were at war,’ Rip went on banteringly. “I 
imagine both of them would qualify very nicely for a 
job delivering telegrams in Washington, D. C.” 

“T think it’s horrid of you, Rip, to be making re- 
marks like that,” said Ruth. “They may have their 
faults, but they are fine boys.” . 

“Admitting that they might be ‘fine boys’,” parried 
Rip, “what might their faults be?” 

“Oh, don’t make out that you don’t know,” said 
Ruth. “You know as well as I do that Filbert Mage’s 
father is just an ordinary practicing physician in De- 
troit, and Maurice Day’s father is in the butter and egg 
business in Cincinnati. They like to pretend a bit, 
but they don’t mean any harm.” 


9 


RIVALS 195 


“Fourflush, you mean,” said Rip. 

“Now, Rip, it isn’t nice of you to talk like that.” 

“Well, I believe in speaking frankly,” said Rip. 
“What you have said has been all news to me, but I 
will say this, it was very welcome news.” 

“Oh, is that so,” laughed Ruth, but she was plainly 
growing self-conscious in the face of Rip’s outright 
talking. 

The situation, however, was relieved, as Ruth’s 
mother came along at this moment and entered the 
circle. 

Rip and Elmer left an hour later, both in high 
spirits. “What’s the idea of these fellows trying to 
put this bonton stuff over on us? I thought they were 
exaggerating a little the other night when they were 
talking about yachts and all that sort of rot, but I 
didn’t think they were just a pair of bold-faced liars.” 

“As Ruth said,” replied Elmer, “they were just pre- 
tending. But what’s the harm, since the girls have 
seen through them?” 

“Yes, they must have got the air, all right. But if 
they bother the girls again they’ll get more than that 
from me.” 

“Now, remember, sonny, you must always be a gen- 
tleman,” Elmer cautioned in a paternal way. 

“Well, I mean it!” said Rip; then he paused for a 
moment and thought. “You’re right; there’s no use 
paying any more attention to those chaps—we’ll for- 
get them.” 

Two things ran through Elmer’s mind that night. 
One of them was the impending game with State, now 


196 | FOUR WINNERS 


three weeks off; he knew within himself that his foot- 
ball efforts so far were trivial compared with the ef- 
forts he would put forth in that game. His other 
thought was of Estelle. Her coolness and indiffer- 
ence provoked him. It was two o’clock before he fell 
asleep. 


CHAPTER XVIII 
A SCOUTING TRIP 


HE following Friday afternoon, as Elmer stepped 
into the locker room preparatory to dressing for 
practice, he was met by one of the student managers. 

“The coach wants to see you in his office.” 

Wondering what was up, Elmer hurried back and en- 
tered the coach’s room. He found Rip and Jones al- 
ready there. 

“What’s up?” inquired Elmer. 

“We don’t know any more than you do, but the 
coach will be back in a minute.” 

A few minutes later in strode the coach. He busied 
himself about his desk for a minute, after having 
greeted the boys. Then he turned to them. 

“This Hochtel game tomorrow doesn’t amount to 
much, and we would possibly win it with our third 
team, if necessary, so I have suddenly decided that the 
three of you and I will go down and look over State’s 
game tomorrow.” 

Elmer’s heart fairly jumped. 

“They are playing Tecumseh,” the coach continued. 
“Tecumseh has a real good team and ought to give 
them at least a fair contest. Of course, our scouts have 


seen every game State has played so far this year, and 
197 


198 | FOUR WINNERS 


we have accurate information on their offense and de- 
fense, but I believe we can learn a little more. So far, 
their defense appears impregnable and their offense 
almost irresistible. So it will be up to the four of us 
to see if we can’t find some weak spot in their play 
which we can take advantage of when our game comes. 
We have a half hour to catch the train, so hurry up, 
pack your bags, and meet me at the station.” 

The boys quickly dispersed. Elmer and Rip hurried 
to their rooms and in five minutes had their bags 
packed and were swinging down the avenue towards 
the station. 

“T certainly am glad the coach picked me to go 
along,” said Rip. “It has been so long since I’ve seen 
a game I won’t know what to look for.” 

“Tt sure was a welcome surprise to me, too,” said 
Elmer. “I can hardly wait to see what kind of a de- 
fensive game State plays. They must be vulnerable to 
some kind of an attack.” 

“T wonder where we will sit,”’ said Rip. 

“Presumably in the press box,” replied Elmer. 
“Coach Brown has probably wired to State for tickets 
up there.” | 

About a block from the station they encountered two 
of the students who were also members of the Fellow- 
ship Club. One of them was the editor of the Daily, 
and the other the manager of the Glee Club. 

“Where are you two going?” asked one of them. 
“Haven’t we got a game here tomorrow?” 

“Yes,” replied Rip, “but Coach Brown is taking 
three of us down to see the State game tomorrow.” 


A SCOUTING TRIP 199 


“Huh, I wonder if I can say anything about that in 
the Daily?” 

“You’d better come down to the station and see the 
coach,” replied Rip; “that would be the safest thing 
to do.” 

Coach Brown was in front of the ticket agent’s win- 
dow, purchasing the tickets, when the boys arrived at 
the station. 

“T understand that you and three of the players are 
going down to State tomorrow to scout,” said the 
Daily editor. ‘Do you mind if I run that story in the 
Daily tomorrow morning?” 

“Not at all,” said Coach Brown, turning around to 
see who it was talking. “I’ve already wired Coach 
Smith at State that we are coming, and asked for 
seats in the press box. There’s nothing at all mys- 
terious about this scouting; it’s all open and above 
board. We’re going down to see just how strong State 
is—to look over their strength, and to discover, if pos- 
sible, any weaknesses. State will have two scouts up 
here tomorrow, though in a game such as we will play 
against Hochtel they won’t see very much.” 

Just then the train pulled in, and the four Dulac 
men, coach and players, boarded the chair car. 

“We could have ridden up in the day coach,” Brown 
remarked as he relaxed in the big soft spacious Pull- 
man seat, “but it’s a long five-hour run to State and 
there’s no use tiring ourselves unnecessarily. We'll 
make ourselves as comfortable as we can here; we can 
go back into the diner about six. 

“We might as well talk over some of the details of 


200 : FOUR WINNERS 


what we are going to do tomorrow right now,” con- 
tinued Coach Brown. “After dinner we may be too 
full of food to think clearly and tomorrow morning we 
may not have time for any detailed talk. When State 
has the ball I want you, Rip, to watch the offensive 
line play. I have here a pair of field glasses which 
T’ll loan you. Focus these on the individual men and 
see if you can detect any weakness in their stance or in 
the secondary reaction of their charge. If you have 
any line men pulling out to run interference in any of 
their plays let me know at once, and also how they 
go out. 

“Elmer, on offense I want you to make notes on 
what plays they use in the various parts of the field, 
under the varying conditions, so that you can get a 
definite idea of their tactics and strategy. 

“Jones, I want you to watch how their interference 
works. Sometimes they use straight line interference 
and other times they use the echelon type. Watch 
closely and see if there are any signs by which you can 
tell ahead of time which type of interference they will 
use. Also watch the ball carriers, and see if they have 
any peculiarities of any sort. 

“T will be watching everything in general myself, 
checking up on their plays, particularly their forward 
pass plays. When State is on defense I want you, Rip, 
to watch the guards and tackles the same as you watch 
the line on offense. Jones, I want you to concentrate 
on the center and fullback and see how they play un- 
der the varying conditions. Elmer, I want you to 
watch particularly their defense against forward passes. 


A SCOUTING TRIP 201 


I understand they use the strict zone defense and I 
want to verify this. Also check up and see just where 
the various backs and the center are when Tecumseh 
executes a forward pass. I’ll watch their ends myself 
and also their varying defensive formations. 

“T hope Tecumseh is strong enough on offense so 
that we can get a good line on State’s defense, and I 
also hope that Tecumseh is weak on defense so that 
State’s offense will function smoothly. If State’s of- 
fense does function smoothly it will be much easier for 
us to find the various things we are looking for. 

“From what I have been able to gather,” continued 
Coach Brown, “our only chance lies in being able to 
forward pass them. From all reports we have re- 
ceived, they have a wonderful line, wonderfully 
coached by the assistant coach down there, a man 
named Green. The four backs are all natural football 
men, athletes who do the right thing more by natural 
instinct than because they have been told. However, 
a team is no stronger than its line. It’s that wonderful 
line of theirs which accounts for most of their success. 
Behind a weak line no backs would ever have a chance 
to get started. A powerful line can make an ordinary 
back look like a star.” 

“Might it not be possible that they will use a differ- 
ent defense against us than they will use against Te- 
cumseh?” inquired Elmer. 

“Yes, that’s quite likely. It is quite likely that they 
will change their formations on defense, but their per- 
sonnel can’t change. It’s personnel and individual 


202 | FOUR WINNERS 


proficiency that we'll be analyzing tomorrow, to a 
large extent.” | 

After dinner they called for a table, which was- 
brought to them by the Pullman porter, and they 
played whist the rest of the way. They arrived at. 
State at about nine-thirty that night and went imme- 
diately to the hotel. Feeling tired from the rather long 
ride, Rip and Elmer went up to bed. The next mor- 
ning Coach Brown called them at seven-thirty with in- 
structions to be down to breakfast at eight-thirty. 
After breakfast Coach Brown called a taxi and they . 
were driven out to the immense stadium which was 
situated about a mile from the center of the town. The 
athletic office of State was situated across the street 
from the stadium and it was there Coach Brown in- | 
structed the taxi driver to pull up. 

They found Coach Smith alone in his office. He 
was apparently busily engaged at a long table which 
was entirely covered with newspaper clippings. 

“How are you, Mr. Brown? We feel highly honored 
to have you pay us a visit.” | 

“Thank you,” replied the Dulac coach, “we just 
thought we would come up here and see if we could 
find out how you do it.” : 

Coach Brown then introduced the others, and when 
Coach Smith shook hands with Elmer, he remarked, 
turning to Coach Brown, “So you made a quarterback 
of my young friend here from Springfield—you are 
certainly to be congratulated. By the way, before I 
forget about it, here are your four seats in the press 
box for this afternoon.” 


A SCOUTING TRIP 203 


“Do you mind if the four of us go over to your 
stadium this morning and look over your field?” asked 
Brown. “You certainly have a wonderful edifice there 
and if you don’t mind we would enjoy looking around 
4 Dit.” 

“Certainly! Ill send one of my assistants over with 
you to let you in, and show you around. I would go 
with you myself, only—you see! Busy! busy! Too 
much work!” 

“Publicity?” Brown inquired, glancing at the news- 
paper clippings covering the desk. 

“Yes; I’ve made several speeches in several of the 
ig cities near here, and the talks have attracted quite 
1 bit of attention in the papers. You'll see here I have 
lippings from papers from coast to coast, reporting 
1bout them. I certainly made some fine statements, 
particularly along the line of athletics, and these 
‘lippings here don’t begin to do me Justice.” 

“T’ve heard you could go on a chautauqua any time,” 
aid Coach Brown. “If you should quit coaching you 
vouldn’t have to worry about a livelihood.” 

“Well, there are a lot of people who have the wrong 
mpression on a lot of things, and it’s up to some of 
1s to correct them,” Coach Smith said, with a gesture. 

“You certainly had nice success with your team this 
rear.” | 

“Yes, I feel very gratified,” replied Coach Smith. “TI 
ook a lot of green boys two years ago, and they have 
leveloped so you would hardly know them today.” 

“Do you have much assistance in your coaching?” 
nquired Coach Brown. | 


204 FOUR WINNERS 


“Not any to speak of. I have a couple of men who 
just carry out my orders as best they can, but the brunt 
of the work falls on me individually. But you have to 
know how to handle men, you know, to get the best 
results out of them.” 

“Well, we must be going,” said Coach Brown, “Tf 
I have time I hope I can see you for about a minute 
after the game.” 

“Fine,” replied Coach Smith, “Pll look for you. 
And if there’s anything we can do to make you more 
comfortable when you come down in two weeks, please 
feel free to call on us. Goodbye, Mr. Brown; goodbye, 
boys; it’s very nice of you to come up here to see me. 
By the way, Higgins, when you are down looking over 
the stadium, you will find that it has a real high fence 
all around it.” 

As they went down the steps, Rip turned to Elmer. 
“What the deuce did he mean by that last crack of 
his?” 

“T guess he means that when the game starts, I'll try 
to run out of the park, but the fence will be too high 
—but I’ll fool him, the conceited donkey. Did you 
ever see a man who loved himself like he does?” 

“He does use the first person now and then,” Rip 
replied smiling; “but then, of course, he may have a 
right to.” } 

“Oh, shucks,” Elmer answered, “from what Pve 
heard, Green, his assistant coach, does most of the real 
coaching, and Smith does the handshaking. It’ll be mn- 
teresting to hear the alibis he'll have to offer after we 
beat them.” 


A SCOUTING TRIP ! 205 


The stadium proved to be beautifully arranged. 
Every seat was evidently a good point of vantage from 
which to watch the game. The facilities for handling 
the crowd were well taken care of in every way; but 
what impressed Elmer most of all was the wonderful 
quality of the turf—the resiliency and toughness of it. 
It was as smooth as a carpet, and it was evident, even to 
his inexperienced eye, that the field would be fast un- 
less there was an exceptionally heavy rain. 

“This is certainly a wonderful stadium” Rip ex- 
claimed. 

“Yes, but I bet it’s worrying somebody about who’s 
going to pay for it. The interest and overhead on a 
place of this sort must be fremendous. How about 
those air-currents we’ve read about?” Elmer in- 
quired of Coach Brown. 

“Don’t worry about any air-currents,’ the coach 
replied. “They’re all a myth. You'll catch a punt 
here just exactly as you would back home.” 

A quarter of two that afternoon found all four of 
the Dulac men nicely located in the press box. At 
their end of the enclosure there were several scouts 
from another school who were there to look over the 
Tecumseh team. The other end of the press box was 
occupied entirely by sports writers. Alongside of each 
sports writer was a Western Union operator, with an 
instrument at his elbow. The clatter and the noise of 
the instruments during the game were confusing to 
one not used to them. Elmer turned his attention to 
the field. 

The usual preliminaries over, the two captains met 


206 } FOUR WINNERS 


in the middle of the field with the officials, and a few 
minutes later Tecumseh kicked off to State. The game 
was just about as Coach Brown had hoped it would be. 
Tecumseh was powerful on offense, but weak on de- 
fense. However, powerful as Tecumseh was it was un- 
able to score, while the wonderful State team ran up a 
grand total of thirty-five points during the course of 
the afternoon. 

Paying no attention to the ball, or to the game in 
general, Elmer found himself engrossed with the task 
at hand. He had four sheets of paper, each one rep- 
resenting a diagram of the field. He used one of these 
for each quarter. He charted the game for each quar- 
ter, and, alongside of each down, he put the kind of 
play which the State quarterback used. When Tecum- 
seh had the ball, Elmer concentrated on State’s de- 
fense against the forward pass, and found that they 
were using the zone defense. It was quite effective 
that afternoon. However, Elmer could readily see that 
this was due both to the individual proficiency of the 
men in State’s backfield, and to the lack of deception in 
Tecumseh’s forward passing attack. The game was 
drawn out much longer than had been expected; and 
so, immediately after the game, without again seeing 
the State coach, Coach Brown called a cab and they 
hurried to the station just in time to catch their train 
home. 

Elmer was surprised to find that, despite his inac- 
tivity, he had a keen appetite. 

“Immediately after dinner,’ announced Coach 


A SCOUTING TRIP 207 


Brown, “we'll spend one-half hour completing our 
notes, then we’ll get together for a conference.” 

The conference, hower, failed to produce the results 
expected. 

“Tf there are any weak spots in that line, offensively’ 
or defensively, I failed to find them,” said Rip. “I 
never saw such a line for cohesiveness, leg drive, and 
sustained power. It looks as if the forward pass will 
be our only chance. They use the wedge line almost 
entirely on offensive, but they had such perfection of 
execution that they just lifted the Tecumseh line out 
of the way.” 

“To be perfectly honest,” said Jones, “I didn’t see 
very much. If they use both the straight line and the 
staggered type of interference, I couldn’t distinguish 
between them. Their fullback, Renfrew, on defense 
is the best I’ve ever seen. Their defensive center 
stayed on the line all afternoon, but Renfrew seemed to 
have a wonderful nose for plays. He was up close on 
line plays and he was back against forward passes.” 

“What did you notice, Higgins?” asked the coach. 

“Well, my notes show that today their tactics and 
strategy are absolutely orthodox. Inside their own 
twenty yard line they kick on first down and then up 
nearer to the middle of the field they kick on third 
down. They throw no forward passes in their own ter- 
ritory. In fact they play very cut-and-dried zone 
football. They’ll never surprise the defense, as far as 
I can see. Their defense against passes is the zone 
type. Tecumseh’s passes, however, were so simple 
that they were never tested. Renfrew, their fullback, 





908 | FOUR WINNERS 


comes up awfully fast on line plunges, and it’s my 
opinion that a fake line plunge followed by a forward 
pass will fool him. 

“Good!” the coach commented enthusiastically. 
“Now, is there anything about their offense that you 
noticed which might be of value or interest?” 

“Just this,” replied Elmer, ‘‘and I noticed it late in 
the second half—their quarterback leads every play 
except their fake reverse play.” 

“Very good. Our other scouts have brought back 
that point, too, and I paid particular attention to it 
today to verify it. I believe that is a point which will 
prove a valuable asset to us. Their quarterback does 
lead every play except the fake reverse play.” 

“What do you mean by a fake ‘reverse play,’ ” in- 
quired Rip, “if you’ll pardon my ignorance?” 

“Well, Pll explain it,’ said the coach. “A reverse 
play is where the back behind center gets the ball, 
fakes off-tackle, and then passes the ball back to an- 
other back, generally the outside back, who runs around 
the opposite end. Some people call it a criss-cross 
play. Now, on that play the quarterback headed the 
interference back toward the opposite end. However, 
in the fake reverse play, the halfback who gets the ball 
from the center fakes off-tackle and then acts as if he 
passes the ball back to the halfback the same as he did 
on the reverse play. However, he hangs on to the ball 
and spins back through the line. Our defensive tackles 
can stop the fake reverse play if they get enough prac- 
tice on it. Our defensive full and center, by watching 
the offensive quarter, should be in on every play. With 


A SCOUTING TRIP 209 


our team thoroughly trained on that point, I’m certain 
we can stop them; but I will say that I’ve never seen 
‘a team with such power and speed. Personally, I have 
come to the conclusion that Jones can hold his own 
with Hunk Hughes in kicking, and I therefore believe 
we'd better try a kicking game and play for the breaks. 
If there are any fumbles we must get the ball. It’s 
useless to think of trying to make any kind of a march 
against that kind of a team, and forward passing 
against them appears to be dangerous. 

“However, I agree with you, Elmer, that a fake line 
plunge, followed by a forward pass up the middle of 
the field, looks like our best bet. Renfrew does come 
forward a little too fast to be able to stop that kind of 
a forward pass. However, he won’t be susceptible to 
that kind of a pass very often, and you’d better save 
that play for a time when it will do the most good. 

“That line of theirs is wonderfully coached; for all 
practical purposes it will be impregnable to our rush- 
ing attack. However, you, Jones, will have to crash in 
through that line for some gains. If you can make a 
few gains successfully it will bring Renfrew up closer, 
thus giving our forward pass plays a much better 
chance. 

“There was no general weakness on defense that I 
could see outside of these points. Their quarterback 
handles the punts remarkably well, though he is not 
particularly adept at returning them. Our plan will 
have to be a strong kicking game with every man alert 
for a fumble. If we can get the ball up deep in their 





210 -- FOUR WINNERS 


territory, we will have to score either by means of a 
forward pass or a place kick by Jones.” 

They discussed the game until about eleven o’clock, 
when the porter announced that they were pulling into 
Dulac. 


CHAPTER XIX 
THE SCENE OF BATTLE 


ONDAY noon Coach Brown began his work with 

the team by congratulating them on playing 

good football in defeating Hochtel the previous Sat- 
urday. 

“T’m sorry I couldn’t have been here to see it, but 
the coaching staff tells me there was marked improve- 
ment in the play all along the line. Jones, Captain 
Ruggles, Higgins, and myself went down and saw State 
wallop Tecumseh. I want to say right here that State 
has as fine a football team as I have ever seen. They: 
can hit the line, they can run the ends, they can for- 
ward pass, and their kicking game is strong. 

_ “They have no weakness whatsoever on defense. 
They don’t fumble and they are alert. They have 
wonderful aggressiveness, perfect morale, and they are 
going to play us on their own field—don’t forget that! 
When they open up that line attack of theirs, driving 
those fast starting, crashing backs behind that powerful 
line, they may go through us five and ten yards at a 
play; whereas our attack, when it hits those tackles of 
theirs, may break like waves hitting a rockbound shore. 
“And yet, I think we can beat them. We are Dulac. 


We are representing an institution with personality 
211 


212 3 FOUR WINNERS 


and soul, with almost a century of time-honored tra- 
dition. I have confidence in every one of the men here, 
and I believe we can rise to heights because of this 
glorious background behind us. Whereas, State has 
become such a large school, such a tremendous prop- 
osition, that it has almost lost its personality and soul, 
and most of its traditions have been forgotten. And I 
believe that when we go out there, man to man, where 
nothing else counts but sheer grit, pluck, aggressive- 
ness, mental and physical alertness and control, I be- 
lieve that you boys will prove their masters. 

“The margin of difference between victory and de- 
feat is very slight. I want every man to take complete 
notes on the defense I have planned against State— 
and I am also going to add two plays to our repertoire. 
These plays are very similar to the ones we already 
have, except that in their denouement there is an ele- 
ment of surprise. I am not any particular disciple of 
Coué, but I do believe that if we keep repeating to 
ourselves, for the next two weeks, ‘we will win, we 
must win, we can win,’ that it will bolster up our de- 
termination and put backbone in our will to win.” 

There was no scrimmage work at all during the 
week. Two or three of the players who were still suf- 
fering from the effects of the Kingston game and one 
or two suffering from injuries in the Hochtel game, 
were rounding into shape nicely. 

“The coach says we may get a few minutes on de- 
fense and offense next week, just to keep our judg- 
ment oi timing and distance on edge and to tune us up 
for the game,” said Rip, when he and Elmer were dis- 


THE SCENE OF BATTLE 213 


cussing the situation. “He says there will be no more 
eruelling scrimmage, as he’s going to take absolutely 
no chance on any injuries. He said he’d rather have, 
the team a little under-scrimmaged, but chuck full of 
enthusiasm and vim, than to have them over-scrim- 
maged, which means they would be a little dull and 
listless the day of the game.” 

“T like to scrimmage, though,” said Elmer. 

“There’s nothing I like better, either,’ replied Rip, 

“but the coach has probably weighed all the values 
and with his experience he no doubt knows what is 
best.” 
_ The team eased up in its work on Friday. All during 
the week Elmer had practiced over and over again that 
one particular play in which he faked the ball to 
Jones on a line plunge and then running back passed 
it to Kerr, the left end, who would cut in towards the 
middle. The execution was nearing perfection. On 
Friday, however, the work consisted entirely of kick- 
ing and covering punts. Jones was punting better than 
at any time in his career, and he was lofting them high 
into the air, the ball sometimes carrying seventy yards 
before it finally nestled into the arms of some receiver, 
or hitting the ground went rolling up the field. 

The second team played the entire first half the next 
day against Reliance, scoring one touchdown in that 
time. At the start of the second half, when the Re- 
liance team found that they were up against the first 
team of Dulac, their morale cracked and they offered 
but a sporadic resistance during the rest of the game. 
Confining themselves to straight football, the first 


214. . FOUR WINNERS 


string Varsity rolled up four touchdowns before the, 
end of the game. They were not relieved, but played 
the entire second half. 

“What was the coach’s idea in not letting us in until 
the second half?” inquired Credon of Elmer as they 
both stood under the same shower bath, soaping them- 
selves down. 

“T don’t know for sure,” said Elmer, “but I believe 
he has the theory that most of the hard bumps in a 
football game come in the first fifteen minutes in a 
game like today’s. It was not a question of who would 
win the game, but there was uneasiness in his mind, 
probably, on the question of injuries to the regulars. 
He didn’t put us in there until the second half, feeling 
that by that time the Reliance boys would not be hit- 
ting so hard, and hence the dangers of injury would be 
greatly minimized.” 

Just then Rip entered the shower rooms and an- 
nounced that the coach requested that every man be 
in bed at ten o’clock every evening until after the State 
game, | 

“T ’phoned the girls, and called off the dance engage- 
ment for tonight,” he said, turning to Elmer. ‘They 
were real good sports about it. But I’ve made an 
engagement for us to go to the first show at the Palace, 
which lets out at nine o’clock, so we can get back to our 
room easily before ten.” 

“That suits me,” said Elmer. 

The picture at the Palace proved rather uninterest- 
ing to Elmer, and he was glad to get out at its con- 


THE SCENE OF BATTLE 215 


slusion, which came shortly before nine o’clock. Ten 
minutes’ walk brought them to Ruth’s home. 

“Won’t you boys stop in just for a minute?” asked 
Ruth. 

“Thank you,” said Rip, “we can, but just for a 
minute. I’d be a poor captain to break the rule which 
[ am supposed to see enforced.” 

“T have a little surprise for you,” said Ruth, as they 
sat in the parlor chatting. “Mother and I are going 
Jown to the game next Saturday, and I’m trying to 
persuade Estelle to come along, too.” 

“Oh, you must come,” said Rip, turning to Estelle. 

“Well, I don’t know,” Estelle replied. “Mother 
loesn’t think it quite proper for me to go running away 
lown there, just for a football game; she isn’t well 
snough to go along herself.” 

“T wish you’d change your mind and come,” said 
Hlmer. “My folks will all be there and so will Rip’s, 
and with Ruth and her mother coming the party 
wouldn’t be complete without you.” 

“Oh, do come,” Rip teased. “Come on, Estelle, and 
l’ll arrange to see that you all get tickets in the same 
location, and after the game is over, since this is the 
last game of the year, we can all have dinner together. 
We'll have one big time!” 

“T certainly love a good football game,” said Estelle, 
a, little wistfully. “Tl let you know next week. I’d 
love to be with you. 

Rip had all the arrangements worked out in his man- 
ner before they left. 

“Good-night, Ruth,” he said a few minutes later. 


216 | FOUR WINNERS 


“T’ll see you next Saturday after the State game, on the 
mezzanine of the hotel. Il send one of the student 
managers up with your tickets Thursday,” and then, 
turning to Estelle, he continued, “and as for you, little 
mascot, if you want Dulac to win, you'd better come 
along. I know Elmer won’t be worth a nickel unless 
he knows you’re up there cheering for him.” 

“Doesn’t that sound romantic!” Estelle laughed, 
“just like a story book, and I used to think you were 
such a sincere young man.” 

“Do you think she’ll go?” asked Elmer later, as he 
and Rip were undressing for bed. 

“Will she go? Try and keep her away! You’re just 
as unsophisticated regarding girls now as you were two 
years ago—though I will say you have a suave polished 
manner that knocks them dead.” 

“Oh, lay off me! Can’t you ever be serious?” 

“That’s the trouble with you,” said Rip, “you’re al- 
ways serious.” : 

“The trouble with you,” replied Elmer, “is that 
you're always too whimsical, but, by George, you’d 
better be serious next Saturday.” ) 

“That’s a different story,” said Rip. “There’s a time 
and a place for everything.” ; 

“All right,” said Elmer, “this is the time for sleep; 
put out the light.” | 

Monday’s practice was one of feverish activity. 
Whereas the team frolicked and played around before 
the coach’s whistle sounded for official practice to be- 
gin, after the whistle everything was serious attention 
and concentration. The team at this time of the sea- 


THE SCENE OF BATTLE 217 


on was a unit of one; the boys all liked each other 
mmensely. Whatever bad points they had, they over- 
ooked; they counted only the good points in one an- 
ther, and as a result, from a psychological point of 
iew, they were a potent organization. They were in 
, State of mind where all petty jealousies and selfish- 
ess were entirely eliminated;—instead there was a 
eeling of all for one and one for all. It made no dif- 
erence who carried the ball, the other ten men exerted 
hemselves to the utmost to try to keep from the ball 
arrier any would-be tacklers. The Dulac team was 
oted for its effective interference, more than any other 
ne thing. 

Tuesday afternoon the Freshmen, using the State 
lays for ten minutes, were unable to make even a dent 
n the Varsity defense. 

“Just keep watching whichever way the quarterback 
oes,” called Coach Brown, to the center and fullback, 
and that will tell you everything. Wherever the State 
juarterback goes, you go. Our defensive tackle, end 
nd guard can stop their fake reverse. You tackles 
ush that passer harder. Don’t give him time to pick 
ut his man—make him throw hurriedly, and, there- 
ore, inaccurately. Against those passes, you backs 
over the man who goes into your zone, until the ball 
s in the air, then play the ball. Relax all you can so 
hat you can jump high in the air against the forward 
ass. We're not going to knock down any forward 
asses next Saturday. When State forward passes, 
ve’re going to catch them, except, of course, on fourth 
lown. 


218 | FOUR WINNERS 


“T want every man to keep in mind, constantly, the 
down and the yards to gain, position on the field, the 
score, and the time left to play. State will play a very 
orthodox zone game and you can anticipate in a large 
measure every play they’re going to use. Every man 
govern himself accordingly. If you halfbacks see the 
ends start down the field call ‘Pass’ loud enough to be 
heard in the next county, so that the other members of 
the team are warned in time. Don’t lisp it out like a 
timid little girl; bark it out loud, so that everyone can 
hear you. 

“Don’t pay any attention to any of their talk on 
offense. They have a clever bunch, and they may try 
a little chatter to throw you off your guard. However, 
as regards the State team, use your eyes only; don’t 
pay any attention to anything they may say. 

“Here, you Freshmen, try that spinner play again, 
where the end goes around and takes the ball from the 
fullback. When he gets the ball the quarterback leads 
the interference out around the other end and the 
center and the fullback should help the end stop the 
play. When he doesn’t get the ball the quarterback 
doubles up as an extra man on one of our linemen, a 
very simple thing to diagnose, so when the fullback 
sprints back into the line with the ball, the guards 
and the tackles should stop him. If the center and 
full are watching the quarterback, they should be re- 
inforcing the tackles and guards. Don’t be fooled.” 

And so the work went on for half an hour before the 
coach announced the end of defense practice for that 
‘day. 


THE SCENE OF BATTLE 219 


The Varsity then went on offense, confining itself 
tirely to a forward passing attack. Although the 
reshmen knew that nothing but forward passes were 
yming, yet Elmer completed many nice passes to 
err, through sheer individual excellence of perform- 
nee, 

Wednesday they had some work covering kicks and 
d some tackling in the open. Near the end of the 
actice the entire squad went in for some live tack- 
ag. A half dozen wind sprints completed the work- 

t. Thursday the workout consisted merely of some 

bering up exercises; nothing of a serious nature 

as attempted. Friday morning the entire squad left 
r State. 
The Dulac boys limbered up on State field that 
fternoon. Elmer was surprised to find that catching 
unts in the big stadium was just just as easy as 
atching them back home, exactly as Coach Brown had 
uid it would be. If there were any wind currents 
resent, they never dallied with any of the punts 
hich Jones sent down that afternoon. After the 
‘orkout the entire squad dressed and were driven out 
) a nearby country club, where they were to spend the 
smaining hours before the game. 

As they were riding out on the bus Elmer remarked 
>) Rip that he had seen his old druggist friend from 
pringfield, who had told him that half the town of 
pringfield would be there on the morrow, coming on a 
oecial train. . 

“TY guess they’ve a complete sell-out,” said Rip. 
The president of the Senior class told me that every 








i 
220 | FOUR WINNERS | 
Dulac student had signed up for the special leaving 
there tomorrow morning. The band was rather peeved 
because they couldn’t come up today, but the faculty 
refused to allow them to miss any classes. Well, to- 
morrow at this time it will be all over, and we'll be 
either heroes or dubs.” 

“T hope it’s heroes,” said Elmer. “I hate to snl 
Hunk Hughes’ great record at State, and I think he 
is a good enough sport to feel the same way about us; 
but we must beat Coach Smith. GOs state wouldng 
be big enough to hold him if they win.’ 

“They say the betting odds are two to one on State. | 

“Oh, this betting stuff gives me a distinct pain,’ ’ said 
Elmer. “Some of these pikers when ae bet and win, 
pat themselves on the back and say ‘aren’t we great 
fellows?’ and if they lose, they sob out loud sae it, 
and want to fire the coach.” | 

Arriving at the Country Club, the boys went to their 
rooms, after which they came down and partook of a 
wholesome well-cooked meal. During the dinner @ 
student manager came in. i 

“There’s a crowd of fellows out here from Spring- 
field,’ he said. ‘They want to talk to Mr. Higgins.” 

“Station yourself at the front door,’ Coach Brown 
instructed the manager, “and tell everyone, I don’t 
care who it is, that they can’t see any of the players 
until after the game tomorrow. After the game they'll 
have plenty of time to do all their visiting.” 

The coach also detailed two other student managers 
to help out the first one, as it was evident that they 


THE SCENE OF BATTLE 221 


rere to be busy all evening keeping away visitors and 
vell-wishers. | 
Immediately after breakfast the next day the team 
vas again loaded into busses and driven into town to 
he hotel. The coach had reserved the entire top 
loor of the hotel for the team, and instructed them to 
ake off their shoes and to lie at full length on the bed 
intil the call for lunch. Whereas breakfast had con- 
isted of an orange, a large steak, toast and milk, the 
uncheon consisted of nothing but consommé with very 
ittle toast. After lunch, which was served at eleven 
clock, the team was again instructed to lie at full 
ength on the bed for another hour. At twelve-thirty 
he phone in each room rang, and the voice of the 
‘tudent manager called, ‘““Everybody downstairs.” 
The hotel was a maelstrom of excited, jabbering hu- 
nanity; but, under the leadership of the head student 
nanager, the entire squad made its way to the side door 
vhere they were loaded into the bus for the stadium. 
Arriving at the players’ entrance they found there a 
arge crowd, apparently hopeful of being able to sneak 
nto the game some way or another. Eaeh player, in 
‘act, did take in with him one small boy or maybe two, 
(0 which the gate keeper made no exception. But that 
was the end of it. After the student manager had 
gassed the last of the players in, the burly gate keeper 
slammed the gate. “That’s all!” he yelled. “There'll 
oe no gate crashers slipping through here today.” Yet, 
‘or long afterward, that excited and still hopeful crowd 
stood jammed around the players’ entrance. At every 
sate it was the same. The scene was set for the battle. 


| 
222 | FOUR WINNERS | 
The air was electrical with mass excitement. It was 
unquestionably the greatest sporting event in the his- 
tory of the Middle West—Dulac and State! 
And in the heart of Elmer Higgins, more than any 
other man on the visiting team, a grim determination 
to win, to achieve victory! 


CHAPTER XX 


THE GREAT GAME 





UMBER twenty-seven,” called the student man- 
ager. 

“Here,” replied Elmer, as he walked over and took 

harge of the sailor bag which the manager picked out _ 
f a large trunk. 
Slowly and carefully, Elmer began to don his foot- 
pall clothes. He spent a little time adjusting his shoul- 
ler pads to just the proper place under the jersey. He 
vas painfully exact as he rolled up his stockings in the 
ootball pants with the rubber sponge which went to 
srotect the patella. He re-adjusted the tape around 
1is ankles twice before he felt satisfied. The new shoes 
which he had broken in the previous week were now 
snug and comfortable. He squatted down once or 
wice and feeling that the tape around his thigh guards 
was a little too tight, loosened the pants, and getting 
1ew tape, taped the thigh guards anew. This time they 
were too loose. Again he experimented, until he felt 
satisfied that the tape was on tight enough so that it 
vould hold, and not too tight, in which case a sudden 
ensing might break the tape. 

For the first time that year Elmer felt nervous, ex- 


eedingly nervous! He shook as he thought of the 
223 


224 : FOUR WINNERS 


impending conflict. For an instant that little sal 
of cowardice which is present in all of us asserted itself, 
Wouldn’t it be better if Mull or Berlin went out there) 
and played today? He felt weak in the pit of his 
stomach while the thought of his tremendous respon= 
sibility overwhelmed him. An instant later his teeth) 
crunched, and his fists clenched, and a rush of blood| 
carried new stiffening to his backbone. | 

“T’ve lived a lot preparing for today,” said Elmer to 
himself. “Only a yellow dog would go out there now 
and quit. I’m just a little bit nervous now, but as soon 
as the first kick-off is over I’ll settle down. Steady, old 
man, aay There’s a lot depending on you today, 
and you’ve got to come through.” 

He walked over to the fountain in the corner for | 
drink. He heard voices in the corner. 

“T tell you,” said one voice, “if you would pull that 
old shoestring play on the opening play, you would 
score a touchdown right away.” 

“That’s nay kind of you to come in and tell me 
about this,” said the second voice, which Elmer recog- 
nized as hat of Coach Brown, “but I’m afraid.a play 
of this sort wouldn’t work against a veteran team like 
State.” 

“Oh, the stupidity of you football coaches makes me 
sick!” the first voice now exclaimed. “I saw Osceola 
high pull the shoestring play against Niles, and it was 
the most beautiful thing you ever saw. If you don’t 
pull it on State this afternoon, I’m off you for life.” 

“Well, thanks for dropping in,” said Coach Brown, 
“and many thanks for your tip.” 


q 


THE GREAT GAME 225 


Elmer went back to his bench and continued putting 

j the finishing touches to his dressing. 
_ “What a lot of queer people there are in the world,” 
1e thought. “Here is a man who is probably either a 
uccessful lawyer, a doctor, business man, salesman, 
r a barber; like as not he might be unsuccessful in 
is own line of work, and yet he takes it upon himself 
0 instruct a professional and successful football coach, 
znd to do it just an hour before the big game of the 
year!” 

It was hard for Elmer to understand how Coach 
Brown held his temper so evenly under all these trying 
-onditions. 

But here Elmer’s reflections were broken; some one 
walked over and was standing by his side. He looked 
ip—it was Rip. 

“T have a note here from Ruth,” said Rip. ‘She 
aid they all met without any trouble and had lunch 
ogether. They’ll see us after the game on the mezza- 
uine. Estelle is in the party, and the setting is com- 
jlete. We're all ready, aren’t we, old boy?” 

Elmer tried to be nonchalant. 

“A football game is just a football game,” he began; 
out inwardly he was glad—glad that Estelle was pres- 
nt with his own people, to watch him make his su- 
sreme effort. 

Completely dressed Elmer went over to the rosin bag 
and smeared a quantity of rosin over his jersey, chest, 
and forearm, and on his pants. Dad Moore smeared a, 
lot of molasses over the front and forearm of the jer- 
sey of Berlin, as that young man still had a tendency 





226 . FOUR WINNERS 


towards fumbling. This was not necessary in Elmer’s 
case, and he was glad, as the stuff was horribly sticky. 

Then—“Everybody out but the players!” called the 
coach, and the players all arranged themselves in Py 
circle on the floor. The only ones allowed to remain 
were three old alumni—three successful business men, 
whose hobby was football—enthusiasts for the school 
and the team. They always worked with the coach in 
every way, and were of invaluable assistance in getting 
points of view or impressions across to the players. In- 
variably, they were afraid the team was going to lose 
and it was because of this gloom complex that the 
coach always insisted that they be around the team 
before the game and sit with him on the bench. 

With the team now gathered in a circle before 
him, the coach named the opening line-up—the same 
line-up that had started the game against Aksarben. — 

“You're all a little bit too nervous and high strung,” 
he said. “You’re too over-anxious, and that means 
you're going to be off-side a lot; and that means pen- 
alties. Let’s relax just a little physically, without re- 
laxing mentally. We're going to play a kicking game 
today, and lay for the breaks. That means we will 
have to present an impenetrable defense. I’m going 
to review just a few points that we’ve been going over 
during the last few weeks, just to make sure that these 
ideas are all positively clear in our minds. 

“When State uses close formation, I want our ends 
in there a mile a minute smashing up the formation 
before it gets a chance to get started. I want the de- 
fensive tackles roving around in and out so that the 


THE GREAT GAME 297 


State quarterback can’t tell where to expect to find you. 
I want the defensive guards submarining down under- 
neath, all afternoon, so that the State line can’t lift you. 
But don’t play ostrich, or think that for the time being 
you are a Mohammedan. Never go flat to your stom- 
ach. On your second reaction get your head up and 
have your arms free so that when the man carrying the 
ball gets near you, you can grab him. 
“You defensive center and fullback, you must keep 
roving around, must keep moving, so the State quarter- 
back can’t tell where to find you either. But be at the 
ight place when the ball is snapped. Don’t hesitate. 
Ren and analyze at the same time and meet every 
play with all the punch, force, and determination you 
can put into it.” 
_ He turned next to the defensive halfbacks. “You 
ik responsible mostly for passes,” he told them. 
“Keep talking to each other on defense and keep in 
contact—know what the other fellow is going to do. 
‘Defensive quarterback is responsible for any sneakers, 
like the shoestring play, where one man will hide out on 
the sidelines. Every man must be alert every instant, 
but relax physically whenever you can. Indomitable 
spirit, irrepressible fight, and an active mind—those are 
the things that win! No matter what happens, every 
man must keep saying to himself, ‘We Will Win.’ I 
want no one talking to the officials except Captain 
Ruggles. This is going to be a fierce contest, but I 
don’t want any Dulac man to do anything that isn’t 
fair or within the rules. 
. “But let’s play it hard, boys—there’s nothing in the 


| 











228 | FOUR WINNERS 


rules against playing the game hard, so hard, in fact, 
that some of the State boys will begin to think of 
home, mother, and the sidelines. As the game wears. 
on, youre going to get tired; you’re going to be 
bruised; you’re going to feel all in; but that’s the time | 
to figure that the boys on the Sve team feel exactly 
the same—then nothing else counts but guts. Is there | 
anything you want to say, Rip? This is the last game 
for you, too, Credon, Jones, Higgins, and Kerr.” 
“Nothing except this,” said Rip and his eyes blazed, , 
and his jaw protruded “this is the last game I’ll ever” 
play for old Dulac. We’ve been a lot of pals together 
all fall, and we’ve played together, have had a lot of 
fun together, have studied together, and have fought 
together. This is the last game for Higgins, Kerr, 
Credon, and Jones. I know how they feel—they’re 
going out there to give all they have. But how about 
the rest of you fellows? Are you going out with us, 
to be one of us, so that regardless of what happens we 
can hold our heads high and proud?” 
“We are,” they all chorused; and the heart of every 
man there contracted with the impact of that promise. 
“Then, let’s go,” said Rip. And the Dulac team) 
stormed out of the door. k 
As they lined up in the runway of the big stadium, 
Rip pressed a note into Elmer’s hand. On a piece of 
hotel paper was scrawled in the handwriting of his 
father, which he knew so well, these words, “Good 
luck, Mother and Dad.” He felt the tears swelling in 
his eyes; but an instant later he was sprinting in 
through the gate and on to the gridiron, with his team- 





THE GREAT GAME 229 


mates, and everything was forgotten but the game at 
hand. Up and down the field they went, until the 
‘perspiration began to appear on their foreheads. 
Then to the sidelines, the whole team, except the 
kickers and receivers. 

Jones sent a half dozen kicks soaring fifty to sixty- 
five yards, down the field. Elmer watched each one of 
them right into his arms, with never a trace of fumbling 
or bobbling. His powers of concentration were so in- 
tensified that he could not have taken his eyes off the 
ball if he wanted to. Then he walked over to the 
sidelines, and sat down beside Coach Brown. 
 “What’s the last word?” 

“There’s nothing more that I can tell you now, noth- 
ing that will be of any help. Meet conditions as they 
arise, on your Own initiative, and if you get behind, 
don’t be discouraged. You have resourcefulness and 
T have every confidence that you can outwit these other 
fellows.” 

Rip came running off the field at this moment. 
“We've won the toss, and are kicking off.” The three 
shook hands, and out the players went. 

Taking the ball from the referee, Elmer held it on 
the ground with one finger for Jones, who was kicking 
off. 

“Who'll make the first tackle?” called out Captain 
Rip; and as Elmer glanced around he could see that 
his ten teammates were like ten race horses, straining 
at the leash. 

“Are you ready, Captain Hughes? Are you ready, 
Captain Ruggles?” 





230 3 FOUR WINNERS 


The referee’s whistle sounded, and an instant ig 





Jones sent the ball soaring far over the goal line. The 
game had actually begun. 

Ten Dulac men went sprinting down the field, but. 
Elmer had to stay back as safety. The ball was 
brought to the twenty yard line, a State player having ‘ 
touched it for a touchback. State lined up in slosell 
formation, but Elmer still stayed back, almost forty 
yards, as ie knew that even from close formation his_ 
friend Hunk Hughes could punt over fifty yards. } 

But there were no punts coming. Driving right 
through the tackles and guards and center, the irre-_ 
sistible golden avalanche from State rolled up the field. 
Three to five yards a down they came. : 

“We'll stop them as soon as they get to our thirty 
yard line,” thought Elmer. But there was no stopping © 
them on the thirty yard line. Once Renfrew was held > 
for no gain, but on the next play Hughes plunged right - 
over the Dulac left guard for nine yards, landing 
squarely on his nose, so terrific had been his forward — 
impetus. 

Elmer called the signal which changed the defengal 
to the square formation. He, himself, who was sup-— 
posed to be back playing safety, found himself up al-_ 
most on the line of scrimmage, tackling with every 
ounce of energy that was in him. Still they came on 
irresistibly pushing the lighter Dulac team before’ 
them. Straight to the one yard line—State’s ball on 
the one yard line, first down, four tries to make a 
touchdown! Elmer called for time out. 

The Dulac boys gathered around him in a circle. 


| THE GREAT GAME 231 


ip had one eye partly closed, his face was so dirty he 
was almost unrecognizable, and he was sobbing softly. 
The little one hundred and sixty pound left guard was 
proggy; already it was apparent that he was all in. 
‘The rest of the team were dazed and battered from the 
terrific storm which had hit them. At that instant out 
came the only two hundred pounder on the Dulac team, 
to replace the gallant little left guard who was led to 
the sidelines, incoherently muttering that “it wasn’t 
fair’—he wanted to be in there “when the ball was 
kicked off.” | 
_ “We've got to hold them here or we're licked,” said 
Rip to the other nine teammates, the incoming player 
being still over to one side, as the rules were quite clear 
that an incoming substitute was not allowed to com- 
municate with his teammates until one play had 
elapsed. 
- “T'll move up to the line of scrimmage,” suggested 
Jones, “making an eight-man line. I'll get between 
you, Rip, and the tackle. They may not recognize 
this point, and one of us ought to slip through the line 
every time.” 
“Good,” said Rip, “let’s go back, boys, because if we 
don’t hold them here we’re licked—so let’s hold them.” 

The time being up the referee blew his whistle and 
both teams lined up again. 

“We're going to score right through you, Ruggles,” 
said the State quarterback. 

“T dare you to,” replied the indomitable Rip, as the 
State quarterback began barking his numbers. 

Just before the ball was snapped Jones unobtrusively 








232 | FOUR WINNERS 


and unobservedly slipped up to the line between Rip 
and the tackle. The ball was snapped and the two 
lines met and for the first time that afternoon the 
Dulac line, rising to emotional heights, held the giant 
State line even. But even so, the preponderance of 

power of the great State backfield must have been such 

that it would surely have carried them across the goal - 
line, had not Jones slipped through and with his legs” 
well under him met the hard driving Hunk Hughes 
squarely on the shoulder and tackled him for no gain. 

As the two teams scrambled from the ground there 
was a dazed look in the eyes of the entire State team. 
Elmer moved up alongside Jones and whispered, 
“They’re watching you now, so you stay back and Pll 
creep up in your place this time.” 

At exactly the same spot the State quarterback again 
sent Hunk Hughes; and this time it was Elmer who 
slipped through and tackled him for less than six inches 
gain. Lying under the immense pile, Elmer looked © 
right up into the sweating boyish face of his old friend, 
Hunk—‘“Well, you didn’t make it that time, old boy.” 

“Gee whiz, where did you come from?” } 

A little bit dazed from the shock of the impact, 
Elmer now lined up back in his usual position. As_ 
the State quarterback, looking over the entire Dulac 
team, was trying to analyze what new angle there was 
in the Dulac defense, Elmer walked over and patted 
Jones on the back, and as he did so, he turned his head 
and whispered back to Credon, “It’s your turn to go up 
on the line between the left guard and tackle.” 

Once more the trick worked, the guess was correct; 


THE GREAT GAME 233 


the State quarter this time sent Renfrew plunging 
through the opposite side of the line, only to be met by 
redon just before he got to the line of scrimmage. It 
was fourth down, and still one yard to go. As they 
were lining up, Elmer whispered into the ears of Miller, 
Jones, and Credon, “Look out for a forward pass this 
time, boys; we'll have to stay back.” 
_ The morale of the Dulac line had risen one hundred 
per cent. in the last three downs, and on the next play 
they stopped Renfrew without gain, mainly, however, 
because the State quarterback made the mistake of 
shooting the play directly at Rip. The Dulac team 
had held them for four downs when it seemed an im- 
possibility. It was now their ball. 
_ “Punt formation,” called Elmer, and as Jones went 
back in the kicking position Elmer took his place as the 
second man in the tandem on the right. State played 
their center over to the strong side and their fullback 
came over to the weak side. Elmer had an impulse te 
call for a plunge through center, or for a forward pass; 
however, he stifled the impulse as he realized that 
their entire safety here depended on a long kick up 
the field. 
_ “Ends in tight,” he called and the two ends, who 
were out wide, lined up close to the tackles so as to help 
them keep out the fullback and the center who were 
trying to crash in the flanks. As Elmer was calling 
the signals, he sauntered back towards Jones. 
“Jonesey, old boy, you'll have to kick it out of 
bounds.” Faultlessly the center passed the ball back 
to Jones, and, as Elmer picked himself off the ground 





234 , FOUR WINNERS 


after having blocked the big tackle coming through, he 
found that Jones had sent a wonderful punt down the 
field, which rolled out of bounds after having trave 
eled sixty-six yards. 

“Well, that wins the game for us,” said Rip to his 
teammates as they were lined up on defense. “Now 
let’s take the ball away from them, and we'll march for 
a touchdown.” 

But his prediction was not true. Stung to the quid 
by the unexpected resistance offered at the goal line, 
the State team now began to hit, if anything, even 
harder than before. Straight down the field they came 
for a second march. No deception—no doubt as to 
who had the ball or where he was going, as the quarter- 
back headed every play. It was simply irresistible 
power. Three and five yards at a down they came, 
straight to the eight yard line. 

At this point Hunk Hughes went crashing off tackle 
and though both Credon and Elmer tackled him, he 
had so powerful a leg drive that he shook them both 
off and rolled across the goal line clear for the first 
touchdown. 

Elmer felt his heart sink as they lined up between 
the goal posts, while the State team was making its 
effort to score the extra point. j 

“At this rate,’ he thought, “they will beat us 
twenty-eight or thirty points. My, what a team!” 

Renfrew place-kicked the ball squarely between the 
goal posts and the score stood seven to nothing. | 

“What shall I do?” asked Rip of Elmer. 

“Kick off to them,” said Elmer. “If they can march 


THE GREAT GAME — 235 


ighty yards against us again, we can’t beat them no 
natter what we do. Our only hope lies in letting them 
ave the ball and tiring themselves out.’ 
_ Again Jones kicked the ball across the goal line, but 
n instant after he had done so the official time-keeper 
innounced the end of the quarter and both teams 
hanged goals. Now the State team started up the 
ield, five and six yards at a try, reaching Dulac’s forty 
rard line before the first break of the game occurred. 
Renfrew fumbled, and like a flash, Kerr, Dulac’s left 
nd, pounced on it. It was a lucky break for Dulac, 
s her morale was in suspense. 
“Tf they had marched for one more touchdown,” 
hought Elmer, “there’s no telling how many they 
vould have romped on to during the rest of the game.” 
On the first play, Elmer called Credon off-tackle, 
put he failed to gain. Elmer then tried the other side, 
ind found that State’s right tackle was just as relent- 
ess a driver, and Miller lost a yard—making it third 
lown. He heard Hunk Hughes warning his teammates 
bout the forward pass, so he lined up on punt forma- 
ion and called for a punt. Standing on his own thirty 
vard line, Jones got away a beautiful punt which rolled 
ut of bounds on the fifteen yard line. Elmer again 
locked the big tackle who was coming through trying 
o block the punt, and this time he felt a twinge of 
ain in his side as he charged into the big hulk of hu- 
nanity which was on its way to the kicker. How- 
ver, he felt no after effects, but got up, and jogging 
lown the field, slapped Jones on the back. 

“That’s the greatest kicking you’ve ever done in 





236 | FOUR WINNERS 


your life, old boy! If we can get a few breaks, we'll 
win this game yet.” ) 

The State team kicked on first down and as Elmer 
caught the punt in midfield, despite the fact that he 
was thrown heavily to the ground by the State end, 
he laughed to himself. He would win; he would be 
victorious; he knew what he would do. 

From his present advantageous position he could 
keep running two plays, and with Jones kicking as well 
as he was, he would keep State in a hole the remaining 
half. Then in the second half he would open up with 
his passes and there was still a chance that they could 
show up well. And this was just exactly what hap- 
pened. For some reason State now played a kicking 
game. Elmer would run off two plays as slowly as he 
could, and then on third down Jones would punt it 
back to State again. The half ended with the ball in 
Dulac’s possession in the middle of the field. As Elmer 
sat down in the dressing room between the halves he 
felt that same twinge of pain in his side again, but it 
was gone in an instant. 

For seven or eight minutes the entire Dulac team, 
tired, battered, and bruised, lay at full length, resting 
up for the next half. 

Coach Brown came over and knelt down beside 
Elmer. “Our only chance is to forward pass as soon as 
we get the ball next half, Elmer, because if State starts 
that offense of theirs again they’ll simply push us off 
the field. Coach Smith will probably tell his quarter- 
back to do this and I don’t believe you'll find them 
making the mistake this next half of playing the kick- 


THE GREAT GAME 237 


ing game with us. So take a chance; throw a flock of 
forward passes. They are our only hope.” 

As the State captain had the choice at the start of 
the second half, he chose to receive. 

“Gosh, if they march for a touchdown,” thought El- 
mer, “it’s all off with us. We'll have to play for a 
break.” 

Now almost entirely recuperated, and full of fresh 
vim and vigor, the Dulac team lined up, talking it up, 
and full of aggressive spirit. For the third time that 
day, Jones on the kickoff, sent the ball far over the goal 
line. “Well, they have eighty yards to go,” thought 
Elmer to himself, “and it’s a long way.” 

Starting on her own twenty yard line, again the State 
team moved up the field, at a pace and with a power 
that made the Dulac line seem helpless to resist them. 
As they got to midfield, however, again Dulac got a 
break. With second down, five yards to go, Hunk 
Hughes started for the line and stumbled; before he 
could recover his feet he was downed by three or four 
blue-jerseyed athletes. “Third down, seven,” an- 
nounced the referee. 

“Move up close,’ whispered Elmer to all the backs, 
“but be alert for the forward pass which is sure to come 
as a result.” 

The State quarterback pondered for an instant—saw 
how close all the Dulac backs were and began calling 
his numbers. 

“Signals,” Hunk Hughes sang out,—again the State 
quarterback gave his numbers; and once more Hunk 
bellowed, “signals!” 


938 FOUR WINNERS 


They wrangled for an instant; then, as the State © 
quarterback repeated his numbers there was no inter- — 
ruption. Straight back to Hunk Hughes came the ball, — 
and Hunk faded back and to one side. Elmer saw that — 
the State left end had got by Miller and was streaking 
towards him. Elmer was dropping back to cover him, 
as he saw the ball launched into the air. He relaxed 
and coiled himself, and at just the right time he jumped 
as high into the air as he could, though he could feel the 
body of the State end bump alongside him. Extending 
himself to the utmost, Elmer felt the ball hit his 
fingers, and he pushed it as hard as he could to one © 
side. The next instant he was lying flat on his back — 
with the State end on top of him. 

The wind was entirely knocked out of him. It was 
a queer sensation. Rip called for time and Dad 
Moore ran out from the sidelines, thumped him on the 
back a few times, wiped his face, and Elmer felt himself 
again. 

“Dulae’s ball, first down,’ announced the referee, — 
waving his arms towards Dulac’s goal. 

“What happened?” asked Elmer, turning to his 
teammates. 

“Why, you knocked the ball right into my arms,” 
said Miller, “so it’s our ball.” | 

“Another break in our favor,” thought Elmer; and — 
taking stock of the situation, he saw that they had the 
ball on their own twenty-five yard line. 

“49, 57, 18, 42,”—they shifted to the right, Elmer — 
took the ball from center, and made as if he were giving 
it to Jones, who plunged right into the line. But Elmer © 


THE GREAT GAME 239 


had not given the ball to Jones, he still held it himself, 
and taking several steps back until he was sure he was 
five yards behind the line of scrimmage, he turned 
and whipped the ball straight up the middle of the 
field, right into the arms of Kerr, the left end, who had 
run in behind Renfrew. Renfrew had been sucked up 
into the line, and Kerr would have gone for a long 
gain, but for a spectacular tackle by Hunk Hughes. 
Jones was hurt in the play and time was taken out. 
The injury proved to be only a painful wrench of the 
ankle, which caused Jones to limp during the rest of 
the game. 

The ball was now in midfield; the first play had 
gained thirty yards. “What to play?” 

“Never mind about any line plunges,” Elmer heard 
Hunk Hughes call to Renfrew. “Our line can stop 
them. Lay back, Renfrew, for passes.” 

So on the next play Elmer shot Jones into the line. 
Two yards was the best that Jones could gain, and next 
he called on Credon to run tackle. There was no gain 
on this play, so Elmer tried a trick play which was 
smothered by the hard charging State line. “Fourth 
down, ten,” announced the referee. 

“T’m afraid you'll have to punt,” said Jones. “TI can 
run on my ankle, but I’m afraid I can’t kick at all with 
ite, 

So they lined up on punt formation, with Elmer back 
in the kicker’s position. 

Elmer was now standing on his own forty yard line. 
He ran over in his mind quickly the various angles to 
the situation. He could punt forty yards only, which 





240 | FOUR WINNERS 


would mean that State would get the ball on about 
their twenty or twenty five yard line, and then, of © 


course, State would come back again with that same 
offensive. The light Dulac line were not superhuman, 
and the chances were that they would go to pieces any 
minute, beaten right into the ground. 

Quickly he made his decision, called his numbers, 
and the next instant found the ball in his arms. Going 
through all the preliminary motions of a punt, he 
stopped just before the completion, checked the ball, 


and whirled it straight into the arms of Miller, the : 


halfback, just beyond the line of scrimmage. 

Thirty yards up the field was Hunk Hughes, thinking 
a punt was coming and as a result chasing and trying 
to block the Dulac right end. He had been caught en- 
tirely napping. Down the field like a flash went Miller, 
and with a beautiful sidestep he swept by Hughes, and 
Elmer, coming up the field, could see all the disap- 


pointment and surprise in Hunk’s face as he sprawled — 


on the ground clutching frantically at the empty air. 


The Dulac right end interfered with the State quarter- — 
back just enough so that Miller outsprinted him for the 


goal line. 

It was a touchdown!—Dulac’s first touchdown! 

There was exultation in Elmer’s heart, and his feet, 
which the minute previous had been heavy and leaden, 
were now light and full of spring. 

Dulac lined up on the five yard line to make their 


extra point. ‘You'd better try it yourself,” said Jones. — 


“My ankle is getting weaker every minute”; and so 
with Jones holding the ball, Elmer essayed the place 


THE GREAT GAME 241 


kick. His leg, however, instead of inscribing the ver- 
tical arc, had a little lateral motion to it and the ball 
swung to one side of the posts. Elmer was so out- 
raged he was helpless. The score board read State 
seven, Dulac six. The loud cheering in the Dulac sec- 
tions had died down, and there was renewed activity in 
the State sections. 

The State captain elected to kickoff. Elmer felt him- 
self growing moody and despondent as he walked back 
to receive the kickoff. ‘Here I had the chance to tie 
‘the score and missed it! Here I had the chance—just 
a measly little place kick, and I botched it!” He be- 
rated himself unmercifully as he looked over toward 
the sidelines, and there, as clear as a photograph, he 
could see the face of Coach Smith looking out his way, 
and laughing uproariously. Instantly all the despon- 
dency and gloom was gone—in its place came a flame 
of vigor and determination. He fought with himself 
to stay cool and found it difficult. 

Renfrew kicked off for State, and failing to be ac- 
‘curate, the ball curved to the left and was caught by 
Kerr, Dulac’s left end. Without hesitation, Kerr 
started forward, and covered ten yards before he was 
downed on the thirty-five yard line. 

Elmer called his numbers and shifted to the right, 
the same play that he had tried earlier so successfully, 
a fake line plunge, followed by a pass to Kerr. But this 
time it failed to work. Renfrew covered Kerr and al- 
most intercepted the pass. 

First an end run, and then a trick play failed to gain; 
so Elmer decided to drop back and punt. He punted 





242 | FOUR WINNERS 


forty yards. The State quarterback was tackled in his 
tracks by Kerr, who was playing the game of his life. 

To his surprise, Elmer now saw State introduce the 
complex part of its offense—double passes, triple 
passes, spinner plays. Yet, for some reason or other, 
this stuff failed to work. The Dulac team watched the 
quarterback closely ; it seemed impossible for the State 
team to get going again. After several exchanges of 
kicks in the fourth quarter, State even tried the fake 
reverse play. Even that failed to gain. The fire 
seemed to have gone out of State’s offense, and as the 
game drew towards a close it was evident to Elmer 
that Dulac’s opponents were already becoming satis- 
fied with their one point margin. 

In desperation, Elmer, when Dulac had the ball, 
tried one or two long passes, fifty yards in length, but 
these were either incomplete or intercepted. Standing 
on his own forty yard line, first down, ten, Elmer was 
perplexed as to what to try. The line was still in there, 
doggedly doing the best they could. He turned around 
and looked at his own backfield; but only Credon was 
in any shape to do himself justice. Jones’ ankle was 
paining so badly that he could hardly run at all. Miller 
had absorbed an awful lot of punishment, and there 
was a dazed look in his eyes—he was out there, but 
that was about all. There was no use calling on Credon 
to carry the ball, since neither Miller nor Jones were 
able to furnish any interference. The kicking game 
would get him nowhere. The forward passing game 
was not the thing, as State’s backfield men were lying 
back waiting for them. State’s ends, who in the first 


THE GREAT GAME 243 


part of the game had been playing rather wide, were 
now playing closely, and smashing. Elmer determined 
to use himself. 

He called the numbers; they shifted to the right. He 
took the ball from center and gave it to Jones, who 
plunged into the line for no gain. Again Elmer called 
out his numbers; they shifted to the right again; and 
once more Elmer, the same as before, apparently gave 
the ball to Jones—but in actuality, hid it for an in- 
stant, then went sprinting around the State end who 
had been sucked in. 

A new flash of exultation swept through Elmer’s 
breast, but it was short lived. The next instant some- 
thing hit him, and he was down with a dull thud. 

Looking up, he saw the face of his old friend, Hunk. 
It was Hunk who had spoiled the run. The joy of 
victory was in Hunk’s eyes. 

“T hated to do it, Elmer, but we’ve got to win this 
game,” he said as he got up. 

As Elmer stood to his feet he found that he ached 
In every joint. He suddenly felt tired,—listless; what 
was the use? State had too good a team and Dulac had 
already made a far better showing than her friends had 
any right to expect. 

He turned to the referee. ‘How much time left to 
play?” 

“A minute and thirty seconds.” 

“Punt formation,” called Elmer. 

He was close to the side where the State bench was 
situated. As he stood back in kicker’s position his 
eyes rolled over to the bench and to his surprise and 


244 : FOUR WINNERS 


anger, he saw Coach Smith with his hand cupped, call- 
ing out to his backfield men. It must have been that 
the referee looked over at exactly the same time, be- 
cause he instantly walked up and picking up the ball, 
announced. “Fifteen yards, penalty. Coach Smith 
coaching from the side line.” And picking up the ball 
he carried it fifteen yards, which placed the ball on 
State’s forty-five yard line. 

Out on the field came the furious Smith. He was 
so enraged that his face was livid. Up to the referee 
he came, shaking his finger. 

“What are you trying to do, give Dulac the game? 
Why don’t you make them earn what they get?” 

“Fifteen more yards for coming on the field without 
permission,” said the referee. 

“This is the last time you’ll ever work in a State 
game,” bellowed Smith. “T’ll make it so hot you'll 
never get any games refereeing around this part of the 
country again.” 

“Tf you don’t get off the field real quick, and keep 
quiet, I’ll make it fifteen more,” said the referee, ap- 
parently unperturbed. Smith stopped talking at once 
and sullenly made his way back to the sidelines. 

The ball now rested on State’s thirty-yard line— 
though quite a bit over toward the sidelines. “Call on 
everything you have,” whispered Elmer to Miller, “and 
try to get tackled in the middle of the field. I want to 
try a place kick on the next play.” 

Drawing on all his reserve strength, Miller sprinted 
around the end, and though he gained only a yard he 
had put the ball in fine position for a place kick. 


THE GREAT GAME 245 


“Well, Jonesey, Pll put it up to you. Don’t you 
hink, you can take that leg of yours and forget about 
our bad ankle for just about two or three seconds?” 

“T wish I could,” said Jones, “but it’s absolutely im- 
ossible. Ill hold the ball, and you kick it.” 

Just then Elmer heard a voice: ‘Referee, I’m taking 
ones’ place at fullback,” and turning around he rec- 
gnized Berlin. 

With tears streaming down his cheeks, Jones hobbled 
off the field, carrying with him the congratulations of 
is teammates. 

Leaning down, exactly on State’s forty yard line, 

Imer signaled Berlin back to the kicker’s position. 
They were in place-kick formation. Just at that in- 
a out came a substitute from the State bench who 

eplaced Renfrew at fullback. 

“What was that for, I wonder?” said Elmer to him- 
self. “It’s fourth down, ten—about all we can do is 
kick.” 

And as the referee blew his whistle announcing that 
play might start, Elmer began calling numbers de- 
noting a kick. But as he did so, he noticed the State 
fullback sneak up on to the line between the guard and 
tackle on his left side. 

Quick as a flash Elmer weighed the facts. A forty 
yard place-kick was too far for Berlin. He was only 
accurate on short place kicks inside the twenty-five 
yard line. 

_ Elmer kept on calling out numbers, and the whole 
team was quivering, waiting for the snap signal, when 
suddenly, he interjected the check number—thirty- 


} 


3 a SS 





246 | FOUR WINNERS 


three. This check number, thirty-three, meant that all 
numbers called previously were null and void and that 
new numbers denoting a new play were forthcoming. . 

There was not a sign on Elmer’s face that he had 
seen anything or that there had been any change in 
his plans. Quickly he called the numbers, “45, 54, 69.” 
Back came the ball, but before it reached him Elmer 
had risen up and catching it cleanly, dropped back into 
the right, several yards. The State left end change 
his course, stopped, and stood still until it was too late 
—he was evidently expecting Elmer to try to run 
around him. 

Throwing the ball straight over his shoulder Elmer 
sailed a bullet-like pass right into the arms of Miller, 
who, after a short delay had run right into the terri- 
tory vacated by the new defensive fullback. With the 
ease and grace of an outfielder in the big leagues, Miller 
got the ball, sidestepped the State quarterback, and 
was over the goal line. 

Elmer could hardly believe it. He had acted more 
on impulse than anything else. He could still hardly 
believe it was true, even when Credon kicked the extra 
point, and the score board read, Dulac thirteen, State 
seven. Dulac was ahead! 

State elected to receive and Elmer himself, kicking 
_ off, purposely kicked short so that time would be con- 

sumed. Sure enough, just as the State tackle who re- 
ceived the kickoff was downed, there came a sharp 
crack of the referee’s pistol, and the next instant the 
crowd was all over the field. 

Dulac had won! Dulac had beaten State! 


THE GREAT GAME 247 


Fighting himself clear from some delirious Dulac 
ooters who insisted on carrying him on their shoulders, 
Elmer worked himself to one side and finally got to 
the dressing room. There, through a strange coinci- 
dence, the very first player he met was Hunk Hughes. 
The two old chums rushed together to shake hands. 
No game or contest could come between their friend- 
ship. 

“Well, we beat you,” said Elmer, “but you sure had 
ye better team.” 

/ “Oh, I don’t know about that,” said Hunk, “but I 
want to congratulate you. You certainly think too 
quickly for us. And I guess you’re right about Coach 
Smith—I want to apologize for his actions this after- 
noon.” 

“No apologies necessary,’ Elmer laughed. “He 
won the game for us!” 

“Well, I’ve got to congratulate you, Elmer, on the 
fine team you’ve got—a wonderful bunch of boys.” 
“The same to you—and say, Hunk, I'll see you up at 
the hotel this evening, won’t I?” 

After his shower bath, as Elmer was putting on his 
street clothes he was surprised to feel no particular 
spirit of exultation, after all his years of preparation for 
this greatest event of his life. True, he found a certain 
sense of satisfaction in the victory; but that was all. 
He felt sorry for the State team and for Hunk Hughes, 
his old friend; and he even felt sorry for Coach Smith. 
He began to see things more at their true value; he 
began to realize that a football game is just a football 
game, and not a thing of vital importance after all. He 








248 FOUR WINNERS 


found that what he imagined was hatred for Coach 
Smith had been purely boyish emotion, and that it had 
grown simply because he had made no attempt to check 
it. He realized now that he no longer hated Coach 
Smith,—the idea was absurd!—and that so far as aver- 
age human beings go, Coach Smith, after all, was not 
such a bad fellow. He was a man with certain frail- 
ties—but no one is perfect. 

As Elmer and Rip walked up the street toward the 
hotel a few minutes later, there was no gloating or 
“crowing” in their hearts; even the exhilaration which 
had carried them through the game, was gone. A com- 
fortable sense of satisfaction, that comes from duty 
well done, of a task well performed—this was the sum 
total of the boys’ feelings. 

As Elmer sat at the dinner table a little later in the 
evening he relaxed and felt happy, quietly happy in a 
new and restful way. He felt happy because of his 
parents, who seemed to take such a keen pride in his 
achievements; because of the good friends he had 
made, worthwhile friends; because those in whom he 
was most interested were sitting around the same table 
with him now, happy with him. 

His parents were there, Estelle was there, and Ruth, 
Ruth’s mother, and Rip’s father and mother, old Pro- 
fessor Noon—they were all there. The crowd was a 
jolly one, in an extremely Joyous mood. But to Elmer 
Estelle seemed shy and a little remote, a little far 
away. Where the others in their congratulations had 
been profuse, she had been very brief and rather de- 
tached. Only once during the course of the dinner did 


THE GREAT GAME 249 


he catch her eye. She smiled sweetly, then, but 
Elmer couldn’t quite tell whether it was a smile for 
himself or for his mother who sat next to him. 

There was a lull in the conversation while they were 
waiting for their coffee. 

| “Well, now that you have achieved your ambition in 
athletics, my dear Elmer,” said Professor Noon, “and 
with your scholastic work of such a calibre that I be- 
lheve I can safely say you will be graduated in June, 
what new worlds are you geing out to conquer? Come, 
speak up a bit; you’ve been too quiet and reserved 
down there all evening.” 

| “I’m just tired out, I guess,” Elmer answered; 

T hope you'll pardon my quietness this evening. Bu I 
have a little good news that I know will interest you. 

‘I had a talk just before dinner with Coach Brown and 
his friend, Judge Sommers—you know he’s the biggest 
lawyer in town; and what do you think?—this sum- 
mer I can go into the Judge’s law office to take a posi- 
‘tion which I hope will be permanent. And more than 
‘that, Coach Brown has seen the authorities at Dulac 
and has carte blanche to offer me a position as assistant 
coach next fall at a good salary. The coaching work 
won’t interfere with my law work in any way.” 

_ Here Elmer’s father spoke up. “Yes,” he said, “it’s 

jall true—and of course Elmer’s mother and I are ae 
especially about the chance to go with Judge Sommers. 
<But,” he smiled, “we’re not quite so sure of the coach- 
jing work. But Elmer has already done things so well, 
.we’re willing to let him decide.” 

/ “T am not going into coaching as a profession,” El- 





250 | FOUR WINNERS 


mer explained to the company. “Coach Brown tells 
me it is the worst profession one can go into. He says 
you can’t tell from one year to another where you 
stand. The papers write a lot of exaggerated tales 
about coaches’ salaries, but these stories are generally 
stretched out of all proportion to truth. A good, aver- 
age successful practitioner of law would turn up his 
nose at the salary paid the highest salaried coach in 
America. 

“But I do like football, and I hope I can help Coach 
Brown for two or three seasons. The salary I get will 
come in very handy; the average young lawyer doesn’t 
make very much the first few years. Ask dad!” 

They all laughed heartily at this, and Mr. Higgins 
laughed loudest and longest. 

“You’re right there, Elmer,” he said. “I had to prac- 
tice law eight years before I was financially able to 
marry your mother.” 

“There goes the orchestra,” said Rip. ‘“Let’s go up 
and dance a few dances; our train doesn’t leave 10h an 
hour and a half yet.” 

So excusing themselves the young folks made their 
way out. Up on the mezzanine floor Elmer motioned 
Estelle over to one side, away from the crowd. The 
strains of the orchestra came faintly to their ears as 
they sat there several minutes quietly, without saying 
a word. 

“There’s an awful jam in there,” said Elmer at last, 
“and I hope you don’t mind if I’m tired and prefer sit- 
ting here.” 7 | 

Hstelle smiled. “That’s just the way I feel, too.” 


yl 


THE GREAT GAME 251 


“That’s fine,’ said Elmer, “you always seem to under- 
stand. Besides there’d be an endless crowd wanting to 
shake hands and ask questions. I’d much rather sit 
here with you.” 

There was another silence; then Elmer spoke again. 

“I’m going back to Dulac to practice law, and I’m go- 
ing to make enough being assistant coach so that I 
think I can save some money—but most of all I am 
going to be back at Dulae—what do you think?” 

“T think,” said Estelle, as his fingers closed over 
hers, “I think it’s wonderful.” 

















rtf 


Lain ie 
Py , 





It 


<= 
z 
<x 
ca 
oc 
= 
2 
oO 
= 
al 
= 
ba 
o 
> 
= 
7) 
c 
wu 
> 
= 
=) 


Ppt a 9b 


; Sivpadadenhalichreaeee-hodaiegas 
bath aul AS fale ca BY a UL De lp — ahh eden sh | ehh oh hE L ep re ¢ 

hale in PaCAe UBmnineue higadiadie pied mi pag etiam ah a " 

nto ib ek Shu-uatnbeenbahaeiBobe-gel bags neee , ee ee BNE R SAAR N= 
ah oy ne ASS : ai nptinls gednivnirr itll nh if jejapasbeneyn en sel 

os mics Be abi ion) Ahad, Pj ak AWS pn aia dna tap eR whekot Peta ne 


PV Ri RES Ai) BR OGD 6 VAIS Af. 28h 9 Ente Sod font me tid hcaniabob ania Fey eet hy Apa bOl RMA ERE 
WP yn pelea we Poe ee ohh amy - mica adhe Palen Fa aT ay ae 
PEW BO te Btwn UR eel Akin SGA IR 9 he ata nines cpsiarrt a8 NA oS -afbsfimiicey.chingrmd niga é Se ee lone git 
TAR i Aah aE RBS th OR ao Korth 8s hyped viel) sang alin teat .ntrnageierc ooo - . mien 
pth. Fae i ned eis Leo LODO LA TOR ah Mime hn ohn Lbs Anumaskel chal ie td ert do 
TADS Ie hooky A SEMPRE Mo tS MAM oll date Bar tee (a) cik . cet 
AAS HC NOE ap A hte Got eS Ga Rent ohn Aap 
Serer cut Se tee Tere eae, Stier oa enna wed sin - 
OB GRE R re eth GREK Made (aM Mtognis, be 342K (jae york ayachojh>pateee sew yb esl gateaes 
he Pa EE oe HAG Re eR = AAPA AG Ghee) Fey iran 4 sa ed reine ie Ais PM Pe Toe Pn kr - “ ~ STADE om oR fl Rh aoe 
rpm eket afait + aGntat ob hal tethrPefes—toway ay, indlinnduaepe ee Sa eed 
Healt ot gh EOD od af). 4 OB tie het orracte to. 4 ps 


0h peep at YY aims ame Ko 
ee ey ee ee ee en a jeri 


abe pneleteue eee wea te a b ® eens 





